clx8640 Series PDF

Color Laser MFP
CLX-8640/8650 series
CLX-8640ND, CLX-8650ND
(Ver1.0)
SERVICE MANUAL
Color Laser MFP Contents
1. Precautions
2. Product specifications and Description
3. Disassembly and Reassembly
4. Troubleshooting
5. System Diagram
6. Reference Information
Refer to the service manual in the GSPN (see the rear cover) for more information.
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Contents
Contents
1. Precautions ........................................................................................................................................1 − 1
1.1. Safety warning ..........................................................................................................................1 − 1
1.2. Caution for safety ......................................................................................................................1 − 2
1.2.1. Toxic material...............................................................................................................1 − 2
1.2.2. Electric shock and fire safety precautions ...........................................................................1 − 2
1.2.3. Handling precautions .....................................................................................................1 − 3
1.2.4. Assembly and Disassembly precautions .............................................................................1 − 3
1.2.5. Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury ..............................................................1 − 4
1.3. ESD precautions ........................................................................................................................1 − 5
2. Product specifications and Description ....................................................................................................2 − 1
2.1. Product Overview ......................................................................................................................2 − 1
2.2. Specifications............................................................................................................................2 − 2
2.2.1. General .......................................................................................................................2 − 2
2.2.2. Print............................................................................................................................2 − 3
2.2.3. Controller and Software..................................................................................................2 − 4
2.2.4. Scan............................................................................................................................2 − 8
2.2.5. Copy...........................................................................................................................2 − 9
2.2.6. Fax ........................................................................................................................... 2 − 11
2.2.7. Paper Handling ........................................................................................................... 2 − 14
2.2.8. Consumables .............................................................................................................. 2 − 17
2.2.9. Maintenance Parts ....................................................................................................... 2 − 18
2.2.10. Options ..................................................................................................................... 2 − 19
2.3. System Configuration ............................................................................................................... 2 − 20
2.4. Feeding System ....................................................................................................................... 2 − 25
2.4.1. Cassette ..................................................................................................................... 2 − 25
2.4.2. Pick-Up Unit .............................................................................................................. 2 − 26
2.4.3. Registration Unit ......................................................................................................... 2 − 27
2.4.4. MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) Unit ................................................................................... 2 − 28
2.4.5. Exit Unit.................................................................................................................... 2 − 29
2.4.6. Duplex Unit ............................................................................................................... 2 − 30
2.5. Fuser unit ............................................................................................................................... 2 − 31
2.6. Image Creation........................................................................................................................ 2 − 32
2.6.1. Printing process overview ............................................................................................. 2 − 32
2.6.2. Imaging Unit .............................................................................................................. 2 − 33
2.6.2.1. Imaging Unit Overview .................................................................................. 2 − 33
2.6.2.2. Drum drive .................................................................................................. 2 − 34
2.6.2.3. Developer Unit ............................................................................................. 2 − 35
2.6.3. ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Unit.............................................................................. 2 − 37
i Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Contents
2.6.3.1. ITB Unit overview ........................................................................................ 2 − 37

2.6.3.2. Transfer belt drive ......................................................................................... 2 − 38
2.6.3.3. Transfer belt cleaning..................................................................................... 2 − 39
2.7. Laser scanning unit (LSU) ......................................................................................................... 2 − 40
2.7.1. LSU overview............................................................................................................. 2 − 40
2.7.2. Laser Scanning Optical path .......................................................................................... 2 − 41
2.7.3. Laser synchronizing detectors ........................................................................................ 2 − 42
2.8. Drive System .......................................................................................................................... 2 − 43
2.8.1. Drive Motors .............................................................................................................. 2 − 43
2.8.2. Main Drive Unit (OPC, DEVE, ITB, T1 DIS_ENG)........................................................... 2 − 45
2.8.3. PH(Paper Handling) Drive ............................................................................................ 2 − 46
2.8.4. Fuser_Exit Drive ......................................................................................................... 2 − 47
2.8.5. Cst Lift Drive ............................................................................................................. 2 − 48
2.8.6. Toner Supply Drive...................................................................................................... 2 − 48
2.8.7. Waste Toner Container Drive ......................................................................................... 2 − 49
2.8.8. ITB Auger Drive ......................................................................................................... 2 − 49
2.9. Duplex Automatic Document Feeder(DADF)................................................................................ 2 − 50
2.9.1. DADF overview.......................................................................................................... 2 − 50
2.9.2. Electrical parts location ................................................................................................ 2 − 51
2.9.3. DADF Drive System .................................................................................................... 2 − 53
2.10. Hardware Configuration ............................................................................................................ 2 − 55
2.10.1. Main Controller .......................................................................................................... 2 − 58
2.10.2. OPE controller ............................................................................................................ 2 − 62
2.10.3. ADF PBA .................................................................................................................. 2 − 65
2.10.4. TCF(Triple Cassette Feeder) PBA................................................................................... 2 − 69
2.10.5. SMPS board ............................................................................................................... 2 − 70
2.10.6. Fuser Drive Board (FDB).............................................................................................. 2 − 72
2.10.7. HVPS board ............................................................................................................... 2 − 73
2.10.8. Eraser PBA ................................................................................................................ 2 − 75
2.10.9. Fuser PBA ................................................................................................................. 2 − 75
2.10.10. CRUM PBA ............................................................................................................... 2 − 76
2.10.11. Deve CRUM Joint PBA ............................................................................................... 2 − 76
2.10.12. Toner CRUM Joint PBA .............................................................................................. 2 − 76
2.10.13. ITB Encoder PBA ....................................................................................................... 2 − 77
2.10.14. Toner Connector PBA .................................................................................................. 2 − 77
2.10.15. Connector PBA ........................................................................................................... 2 − 78
2.10.16. Side Joint PBA ........................................................................................................... 2 − 78
2.10.17. Finisher IF PBA ......................................................................................................... 2 − 79
2.10.18. Paper Size PBA .......................................................................................................... 2 − 79
2.10.19. Sensor locations .......................................................................................................... 2 − 80
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. ii

Contents
3. Disassembly and Reassembly ................................................................................................................3 − 1

3.1. Precautions when replacing parts ..................................................................................................3 − 1
3.1.1. Precautions when assembling and disassembling .................................................................3 − 1
3.1.2. Precautions when handling PBA.......................................................................................3 − 1
3.1.3. Releasing Plastic Latches ................................................................................................3 − 2
3.2. Replacing the maintenance part ....................................................................................................3 − 3
3.2.1. Drum Unit....................................................................................................................3 − 3
3.2.2. Developer Unit .............................................................................................................3 − 4
3.2.3. ITB Unit ......................................................................................................................3 − 6
3.2.4. Fuser Unit ....................................................................................................................3 − 7
3.2.5. Transfer Roller..............................................................................................................3 − 7
3.2.6. Pick-Up_Reverse_Forward roller......................................................................................3 − 8
3.2.7. DADF Pick-up roller Assy ..............................................................................................3 − 9
3.2.8. DADF Reverse roller Assy ............................................................................................ 3 − 10
3.2.9. MP Rollers................................................................................................................. 3 − 10
3.3. Replacing the main SVC part ..................................................................................................... 3 − 15
3.3.1. Left Cover.................................................................................................................. 3 − 15
3.3.2. Rear Cover................................................................................................................. 3 − 15
3.3.3. HVPS........................................................................................................................ 3 − 16
3.3.3.1. HVPS board1 ............................................................................................... 3 − 16
3.3.3.2. HVPS board2 ............................................................................................... 3 − 16
3.3.4. Temperature Sensor ..................................................................................................... 3 − 17
3.3.5. ITB Waste Auger Drive Unit ......................................................................................... 3 − 17
3.3.6. LSU.......................................................................................................................... 3 − 18
3.3.7. Main board................................................................................................................. 3 − 19
3.3.8. SMPS board ............................................................................................................... 3 − 19
3.3.9. Main Drive Unit.......................................................................................................... 3 − 20
3.3.10. SMPS shield............................................................................................................... 3 − 20
3.3.11. CST Lift Drive unit...................................................................................................... 3 − 21
3.3.12. Fuser Drive Board ....................................................................................................... 3 − 21
3.3.13. Paper Size Sensor ........................................................................................................ 3 − 22
3.3.14. PH(Paper Handling) Drive Unit...................................................................................... 3 − 22
3.3.15. Fuser Drive Unit ......................................................................................................... 3 − 23
3.3.16. Toner Supply Drive Unit ............................................................................................... 3 − 24
3.3.17. Side Unit ................................................................................................................... 3 − 25
3.3.17.1. MP Pick Up Unit........................................................................................... 3 − 26
3.3.17.2. Duplex Exit Sensor........................................................................................ 3 − 29
3.3.17.3. Duplex Motor ............................................................................................... 3 − 30
3.3.17.4. Duplex Fan .................................................................................................. 3 − 30
3.3.18. Exit Unit.................................................................................................................... 3 − 31
iii Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Contents
3.3.19. Pick Up Unit .............................................................................................................. 3 − 32

3.3.20. OPE Unit ................................................................................................................... 3 − 33
3.3.21. DADF Unit ................................................................................................................ 3 − 34
3.3.21.1. DADF Hinge................................................................................................ 3 − 34
3.3.21.2. DADF Cover................................................................................................ 3 − 35
3.3.21.3. DADF Board................................................................................................ 3 − 37
3.3.21.4. DADF Stacker .............................................................................................. 3 − 37
3.3.21.5. DADF COVER-OPEN................................................................................... 3 − 38
3.3.21.6. DADF GUIDE-PICK UP ASSY ...................................................................... 3 − 39
3.3.21.7. DADF-EXIT UP ........................................................................................... 3 − 40
3.3.21.8. HOLDER-HARNESS .................................................................................... 3 − 40
3.3.21.9. COVER-FAN DUCT and COVER-FAN............................................................ 3 − 41
3.3.21.10. DADF-CCDM.............................................................................................. 3 − 41
3.3.21.11. DADF Drive ................................................................................................ 3 − 42
3.3.22. Scanner ..................................................................................................................... 3 − 43
3.3.22.1. Scan Glass ................................................................................................... 3 − 43
3.3.22.2. APS Sensor.................................................................................................. 3 − 44
3.3.22.3. Filter........................................................................................................... 3 − 44
3.3.22.4. COVER-GLASS ADF ................................................................................... 3 − 45
3.3.22.5. Scan Joint Board ........................................................................................... 3 − 45
3.3.22.6. Fan............................................................................................................. 3 − 46
3.3.22.7. CCDM ........................................................................................................ 3 − 47
3.3.22.8. Scanner Assy................................................................................................ 3 − 48
3.3.23. SCF (Second Cassette Feeder) with Stand ........................................................................ 3 − 49
3.3.23.1. SCF Main Board ........................................................................................... 3 − 49
3.3.23.2. SCF Lift Motor Assy ..................................................................................... 3 − 50
3.3.23.3. SCF Feed Motor Assy .................................................................................... 3 − 51
3.3.23.4. FOOT ......................................................................................................... 3 − 53
3.3.24. TCF (Triple Cassette Feeder) ......................................................................................... 3 − 55
3.3.24.1. TCF Main Board ........................................................................................... 3 − 55
3.3.24.2. TCF Lift Motor Assy ..................................................................................... 3 − 55
3.3.24.3. TCF Feed Motor Assy.................................................................................... 3 − 56
3.3.24.4. FOOT ......................................................................................................... 3 − 58
3.3.25. Finisher ..................................................................................................................... 3 − 60
3.3.26. HDD (Hard Disk Drive)................................................................................................ 3 − 64
4. Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................4 − 1
4.1. Control Panel ............................................................................................................................4 − 1
4.1.1. Introducing the display screen and useful buttons ................................................................4 − 2
4.2. Understanding the status LED ......................................................................................................4 − 6
4.3. Updating Firmware ....................................................................................................................4 − 7
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. iv

Contents
4.3.1. Updating from the Printer Control Panel ............................................................................4 − 7

4.3.2. Updating from the Network ............................................................................................4 − 9
4.4. JAM removal .......................................................................................................................... 4 − 12
4.4.1. Clearing original document jams .................................................................................... 4 − 12
4.4.2. Clearing paper jams ..................................................................................................... 4 − 18
4.5. Service Mode (Tech Mode)........................................................................................................ 4 − 33
4.5.1. Entering and Exiting Service Mode................................................................................. 4 − 33
4.5.2. Service Mode Menu Tree ............................................................................................. 4 − 34
4.5.3. Information ................................................................................................................ 4 − 38
4.5.3.1. General ....................................................................................................... 4 − 38
4.5.3.2. Supply Status ............................................................................................... 4 − 38
4.5.3.3. Software Version........................................................................................... 4 − 39
4.5.3.4. Service Hours ............................................................................................... 4 − 39
4.5.3.5. Fault Log..................................................................................................... 4 − 39
4.5.3.6. Print Reports ................................................................................................ 4 − 40
4.5.3.7. Export Reports.............................................................................................. 4 − 41
4.5.4. Maintenance Counts..................................................................................................... 4 − 42
4.5.4.1. Fault Count ................................................................................................. 4 − 42
4.5.4.2. Jam Count ................................................................................................... 4 − 42
4.5.4.3. Part Replacement Count ................................................................................. 4 − 43
4.5.4.4. Finisher Handling Count................................................................................. 4 − 44
4.5.5. Diagnostics ................................................................................................................ 4 − 45
4.5.5.1. Engine Diagnostics........................................................................................ 4 − 45
4.5.5.2. Fax Diagnostics ............................................................................................ 4 − 51
4.5.5.3. Scanner Diagnostics....................................................................................... 4 − 53
4.5.5.4. Adjustment .................................................................................................. 4 − 55
4.5.5.5. ACS (Auto Color Sensing) ............................................................................. 4 − 62
4.5.5.6. Image Management ...................................................................................... 4 − 63
4.5.5.7. Print Test Patterns ......................................................................................... 4 − 67
4.5.6. Service Functions ........................................................................................................ 4 − 68
4.5.6.1. Main Memory Clear ...................................................................................... 4 − 68
4.5.6.2. Hard Disk Maintenance .................................................................................. 4 − 68
4.5.6.3. Toner Save .................................................................................................. 4 − 68
4.5.6.4. Port ............................................................................................................ 4 − 68
4.5.6.5. Debug Log................................................................................................... 4 − 69
4.5.6.6. Capture Log ................................................................................................. 4 − 69
4.5.6.7. System Recovery .......................................................................................... 4 − 70
4.5.6.8. TR Control Mode ......................................................................................... 4 − 73
4.5.6.9. User Data Management ................................................................................. 4 − 74
4.6. Error Code and Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 4 − 75
v Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Contents
4.6.1. Ax-xxxx type error code ............................................................................................... 4 − 84

4.6.2. Cx-xxxx type error code ............................................................................................. 4 − 116
4.6.3. H1-xxxx type (Optional Cassette) error code................................................................... 4 − 158
4.6.4. H2-xxxx type (Finisher) error code ............................................................................... 4 − 175
4.6.5. Mx-xxxx type error code............................................................................................. 4 − 202
4.6.6. Sx-xxxx type error code.............................................................................................. 4 − 219
4.6.7. U1-xxxx type (Fuser) error code................................................................................... 4 − 239
4.6.8. U2-xxxx type (LSU) error code .................................................................................... 4 − 249
4.6.9. U3-xxxx type(DADF) error code .................................................................................. 4 − 251
4.7. Image quality problems and solutions ........................................................................................ 4 − 262
4.8. Other errors .......................................................................................................................... 4 − 271
5. System Diagram..................................................................................................................................5 − 1
6. Reference Information..........................................................................................................................6 − 1
6.1. Tools for Troubleshooting............................................................................................................6 − 1
6.2. Glossary...................................................................................................................................6 − 3
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. vi

1. Precautions
1. Precautions
In order to prevent accidents and damages to the equipment please read the precautions listed below carefully before
servicing the product and follow them closely.
1.1. Safety warning
1) Only to be serviced by a factory trained service technician.

High voltages and lasers inside this product are dangerous. This product should only be serviced by a factory trained
service technician.
2) Use only Samsung replacement parts.

There are no user serviceable parts inside the product. Do not make any unauthorized changes or additions to the
product as these could cause the product to malfunctions and create an electric shocks or fire hazards.
3) Laser Safety Statement

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for
Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC
60825-1. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so
there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance
or prescribed service condition.
• Wavelength: 800 nm
• Beam divergence
- Paraller: 11 degrees
- Perpendicular: 35 degrees
• Maximum power of energy output: 12 mW
WARNING
Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected
beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock,
and personal injury.
1-1 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

1. Precautions
1.2. Caution for safety
1.2.1. Toxic material
This product contains toxic materials that could cause illness if ingested.
1) Please keep imaging unit and toner cartridge away from children. The toner powder contained in the imaging unit and
toner cartridge may be harmful, and if swallowed, you should contact a doctor.
1.2.2. Electric shock and fire safety precautions
Failure to follow the following instructions could cause electric shock or potentially cause a fire.
1) Use only the correct voltage, failure to do so could damage the product and potentially cause a fire or electric shock.
2) Use only the power cable supplied with the product. Use of an incorrectly specified cable could cause the cable to
overheat and potentially cause a fire.
3) Do not overload the power socket, this could lead to overheating of the cables inside the wall and could lead to a fire.
4) Do not allow water or other liquids to spill into the product, this can cause electric shock. Do not allow paper clips, pins
or other foreign objects to fall into the product, these could cause a short circuit leading to an electric shock or fire hazard.
5) Never touch the plugs on either end of the power cable with wet hands, this can cause electric shock. When servicing
the product, remove the power plug from the wall socket.
6) Use caution when inserting or removing the power cord. When removing the power cord, grip it firmly and pull. The
power cord must be inserted completely, otherwise a poor contact could cause overheating leading to a fire.
7) Take care of the power cable. Do not allow it to become twisted, bent sharply around corners or power cable may be
damaged. Do not place objects on top of the power cable. If the power cable is damaged it could overheat and cause a
fire. Exposed cables could cause an electric shock. Replace the damaged power cable immediately, do not reuse or
repair the damaged cable. Some chemicals can attack the coating on the power cable, weakening the cover or exposing
cables causing fire and shock risks.
8) Ensure that the power sockets and plugs are not cracked or broken in any way. Any such defects should be repaired
immediately. Take care not to cut or damage the power cable or plugs when moving the machine.
9) Use caution during thunder or lightning storms. Samsung recommends that this machine be disconnected from the
power source when such weather conditions are expected. Do not touch the machine or the power cord if it is still
connected to the wall socket in these weather conditions.
10) Avoid damp or dusty areas, install the product in a clean well ventilated location. Do not position the machine near a
humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust built up inside the machine can lead to overheating and
cause a fire or cause parts to rust.
11) Do not position the product in direct sunlight. This will cause the temperature inside the product to rise possibly leading
to the product failing to work properly and in extreme conditions could lead to a fire.
12) Do not insert any metal objects into the machine through the ventilator fan or other part of the casing, it could make
contact with a high voltage conductor inside the machine and cause an electric shock.
13) When replacing the SMPS board, please wait 5 minutes after unplugging the power cord, then replace it. You
can get a shock by the electric discharge.
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 1-2

1. Precautions
1.2.3. Handling precautions
The following instructions are for your own personal safety to avoid injury and so as not to damage the product.
1) Ensure the product is installed on a level surface, capable of supporting its weight. Failure to do so could cause
the product to tip or fall.
2) The product contains many rollers, gears and fans. Take great care to ensure that you do not catch your fingers, hair or
clothing in any of these rotating devices.
3) Do not place any small metal objects, containers of water, chemicals or other liquids close to the product which if spilled
could get into the machine and cause damage or a shock or fire hazard.
4) Do not install the machine in areas with high dust or moisture levels, beside on open window or close to a humidifier or
heater. Damage could be caused to the product in such areas.
5) Do not place candles, burning cigarettes, etc on the product, These could cause a fire.
1.2.4. Assembly and Disassembly precautions
1) Replace parts carefully and always use Samsung parts. Take care to note the exact location of parts and also cable
routing before dismantling any part of the machine. Ensure all parts and cables are replaced correctly. Please carry out
the following procedures before dismantling the product or replacing any parts.
2) Ensure that power is disconnected before servicing or replacing any electrical parts.
3) Disconnect interface cables and power cables.
4) Only use approved spare parts. Ensure that part number, product name, any voltage, current or temperature rating
are correct.
5) When removing or re-fitting any parts do not use excessive force, especially when fitting screws into plastic.
6) Take care not to drop any small parts into the machine.
7) Handling of the OPC Drum
• The OPC Drum can be irreparably damaged if it exposed to light. Take care not to expose the OPC Drum either
to direct sunlight or to fluorescent or incandescent room lighting. Exposure for as little as 5 minutes can damage
the surface of the photoconductive properties and will result in print quality degradation. Take extra care when
servicing the product. Remove the OPC Drum and store it in a black bag or other lightproof container. Take
care when working with the Covers (especially the top cover) open as light is admitted to the OPC area and can
damage the OPC Drum.
• Take care not to scratch the green surface of OPC Drum Unit. If the green surface of the Drum Cartridge is
scratched or touched the print quality will be compromised.

1. Precautions
1.2.5. Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury
1) Be careful with the high temperature part.

The fuser unit works at a high temperature. Use caution when working on the printer. Wait for the fuser unit to
cool down before disassembly.
2) Do not put fingers or hair into the rotating parts.

When operating a printer, do not put hand or hair into the rotating parts (Paper feeding entrance, motor, fan, etc.).
If do, you can get harm.
3) When you move the printer, use safe lifting and handling techniques.
This printer is heavy. Use the lifting handles located on each side of the machine. Back injury could be caused if
you do not lift carefully.
4) Ensure the printer is installed safely.

Ensure the printer is installed on a level surface, capable of supporting its weight. Failure to do so could cause the
printer to tip or fall possibly causing personal injury or damaging the printer.
5) Do not install the printer on a sloping or unstable surface. After installation, double check that the printer is stable.

1. Precautions
1.3. ESD precautions
Certain semiconductor devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. Such components are commonly called
“Electrostatically Sensitive (ES) Devices” or ESDs. Examples of typical ESDs are: integrated circuits, some field effect
transistors, and semiconductor “chip” components. The techniques outlined below should be followed to help reduce the
incidence of component damage caused by static electricity.
CAUTION
Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit, and observe all other safety precautions.
1) Immediately before handling a semiconductor component or semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain off any
electrostatic charge on your body by touching a known earth ground. Alternatively, employ a commercially available
wrist strap device, which should be removed for your personal safety reasons prior to applying power to the unit
under test.
2) After removing an electrical assembly equipped with ESDs, place the assembly on a conductive surface, such as
aluminum or copper foil, or conductive foam, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup in the vicinity of the assembly.
3) Use only a grounded tip soldering iron to solder or desolder ESDs.
4) Use only an “anti-static” solder removal device. Some solder removal devices not classified as “anti-static” can
generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ESDs.
5) Do not use Freon-propelled chemicals. When sprayed, these can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ESDs.
6) Do not remove a replacement ESD from its protective packaging until immediately before installing it. Most
replacement ESDs are packaged with all leads shorted together by conductive foam, aluminum foil, or a comparable
conductive material.
7) Immediately before removing the protective shorting material from the leads of a replacement ESD, touch the protective
material to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed.
8) Maintain continuous electrical contact between the ESD and the assembly into which it will be installed, until
completely plugged or soldered into the circuit.
9) Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged replacement ESDs. Normal motions, such as the brushing together
of clothing fabric and lifting one’s foot from a carpeted floor, can generate static electricity sufficient to damage an ESD.

2.1. Product Overview
• Printing Speed (Mono/Color)

• CLX-8650 series : Up to 48 ppm in A4 (51 ppm in Letter)
• CLX-8640 series : Up to 38 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in Letter)
• Processor
• Dual Core 1GHz
• Memory
• 1GB DDR3 SDRAM
• 320 GB HDD

2.2. Specifications
Product Specifications are subject to change without notice.
2.2.1. General
Item Specification
Operating 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F)
Temperature
Storage -20 to 40 °C (-4 to 104 °F)
Operating 20 to 80% RH
Humidity
Storage 10 to 90% RH
Ready mode 43 dB(A)
Acoustic Noise Level
(Sound Power / Printing mode 55 dB(A)
Pressure)
Copying mode 59 dB(A)
Europe : AC 220-240V(-10%~6%)
Input Voltage USA : AC 110~127V (-10%~6%)
Power Supply
Korea : AC 220-240V(-10%~6%)
Rated Frequency 50 / 60 Hz
Ready < 80 Watt
AVG. (Normal < 1000 Watt
Operation)
Power Consumption
Sleep/Power Off < 1.5 Watt / < 0.1 Watt
• CLX-8640ND : 3.6 KWh
TEC
• CLX-8650ND : 3.7 KWh
Dimension (W x D x
Set 550 x 523 x 776 mm (21.7 x 20.6 x 30.6 inches)
H)
Set
Weight 70.4 Kg (155.21 lbs)
(with consumables)
Reliability & Service Recommended Printing 7,000 sheets/month (60% Color ratio)
Volume (AMPV)
Max Monthly Duty 200,000 sheets/month

2.2.2. Print
Item Specification
• CLX-8640ND
• B&W : Up to 38 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in Letter)
• Color : Up to 38 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in Letter)
Simplex
• CLX-8650ND
• B&W : Up to 48 ppm in A4 (51ppm in Letter)
• Color : Up to 48 ppm in A4 (51ppm in Letter)
Engine Speed
• CLX-8640ND
• B&W : Up to 31 ppm in A4 (33 ppm in Letter)
• Color: Up to 31 ppm in A4 (33 ppm in Letter)
Duplex
• CLX-8650ND
• B&W : Up to 40 ipm in A4 (42 ipm in Letter)
• Color: Up to 40 ipm in A4 (42 ipm in Letter)
From Ready Less than 9 sec
FPOT (B&W and From Sleep Less than 15 sec
Color) • Less than 64 sec @ Panel Soft Power
From Coldboot
• Less than 90 sec @ Mechanical Power
Optical 1200 x 600 dpi
Resolution
Enhanced Up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output
Printer Languages PCL5C, PCL6, PostScript Level3, PDF 1.7
• PCL : 93 scalable, 1 bitmap
Fonts
• PS : 136
Downloadable Fonts Yes (PCL & PS3 S/W Font)
USB Memory Direct Print Jpeg, Tiff, PDF

2.2.3. Controller and Software
Item Specification
Processor 1GHz Dual Core
Memory Std. 1GB DDR3
Memory Expansion N/A
Storage 320GB HDD Standard
[Windows]
• Windows 2000, XP 32/64bits, Vista 32/64bits, Windows 7
32/64bits, Windows 2003 Server 32/64bits, Windows Server 2008
32/64bits, Windows Server 2008 R2 64bits
[Linux]
• RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
• Fedora 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 (32/64 bit)
• SuSE Linux 10.1 (32 bit)
• OpenSuSE 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64 bit)
Supporting OS
• Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)
• Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64
bit)
• SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)
• Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit) - Sun Solaris 9,10 (x86, SPARC)
• HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)
• IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4
Printer driver [Mac]
• Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.6
• PCL6 (for Windows)
Default Driver
• PS (for Mac, Linux)
[Windows]
• Watermark, Overlay, N-up printing, Poster printing
• Duplex, Quality, Color mode (Color, Gray scale)
Driver feature • Support Color spec., Device color, color management
[Mac/Linux]
• N-up printing, Duplex, Quality
• Color mode (Color, Gray scale)
Windows 2000/XP(include 64bit)/ 2003/ Vista/ 2008/ Win7/ 2008 R2 (64bit
WHQL
only)
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Korean, Russian, Brazilian
Language Localization
Portuguese
UPD (SSPD) Yes

Item Specification
TWAIN Yes
WIA Yes (N/W, USB2.0 only)
[Windows]
• Windows 2000, XP 32/64bits, Vista 32/64bits, Windows 7
32/64bits, Windows 2003 Server 32/64bits, Windows Server 2008
32/64bits, Windows Server 2008 R2 64bits
[Linux]
• RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
• Fedora 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13 (32/64 bit)
Scan driver
• SuSE Linux 10.1 (32 bit)
Supporting OS
• OpenSuSE 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64 bit)
• Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)
• Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64
bit)
• SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)
• Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)
[Mac]
• Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.6
Yes (Windows, Mac)
• Status Monitoring feature
Scan Manager
• Scan2PC / Fax2PC
• Device Setting
PC-FAX Yes
NW-FAX Yes
OCR ReadIRIS
Application
Smart Panel Yes (Linux) EPM is provided for Windows/Mac
Set IP, SWAS 4.0 & SWS SWAS Plug-In
Network Management
- Job Accounting, Storage management, Cloning, Remote Install
HDD File Management
SWS2.0 (Document Box)
S/W
AnyWeb Print Yes
SmarThru Smarthru Office, SmarThru Workflow(Optional)
■ Interface
Item Specification
Parallel (IEEE 1284) No
Type A High-Speed USB 2.0 Host (2 Ports)
USB
Type B Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Peripheral (1Port)
Wired LAN Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX
Wireless LAN No
Foreign Device Interface Optional

■ Network Interface
Item Specification
[Windows]
• Microsoft Windows 2000/ XP(32/64bits)/ 2003(32/64bits)/
Vista(32/64bits)2008/ Win7/ 2008 R2(64 only)
[Mac]
• Mac OS 10.4 ~10.6
[Linux]
• RedHat 8 ~ 9
Network OS
• Fedora Core 1~4
• Madrake 9.2 ~ 10.1
• SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2
[Novell]
• Netware 5.x, 6.x(TCP/IP Only)
[Others]
• Unix(HP-UX,Solaris,SunOS, SCO)
TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP, SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec,
TCP/IP
DNS,WINS, SLP, Bonjour, SSDP,DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP,IPv6
IPX/SPX No
NW Protocols
Ether Talk No
NetBIOS over TCP/IP Yes
Others HTTPS,LDAPS,SMTPS,802.1x,IPSec
Static IP Yes
Auto IP Yes
IP Addressing
BOOTP Yes
DHCP Yes
MIB-2(RFC 1213) Yes
Host Resource MIB
Yes
(RFC 2790)
Printer MIB (RFC
Yes
3805)
SNMP/MIB Access
Finisher MIB (RFC
Yes
3806)
Samsung Private MIB Yes
HP Compatibility Yes - Patially
SNMP Trap Yes
Window Printing
No
(SMB)
LPR/LPD Yes
IPP Yes
Printing Protocols
Netware I-Print Yes
Netware NDPS No
Ether Talk No
Port 9100 Yes

Item Specification
DNS Yes
Dynamic DNS Yes
Multicast
Yes
DNS(Bonjoure)
Device Discovery
WSD (incl. Print &
NO
Scan)
SLP Yes
uPNP(SSDP) Yes
■ Memory (HDD) Management

Item Specification
Type Public, Private, System
Stored Job Type Print / Copy / Scan / Fax
Box Management
Max. Number of Boxes Up to 100
Box Size Up to HDD Space
Creation Folder
Rename Folder, File
Move & Copy Yes
Delete Yes
Basic Management Search Search(Name,Owner)

Display detail
Name,Owner,Job Type,Size,Page,Date
information
Select Multi File Select
Auto Delete Time
Yes
Setting
Email Yes
Memory to Client Yes
Server Yes
Copies Yes
Duplex Printing Yes
Memory to Print
Color Mode Yes
Setting
Autofit Yes
Paper Supply Yes
Immediate Yes
Image Overwrite
On-Demand Yes
Supported Job Type Print / Scan / Fax
Data Encrytion Cryptography AES
Key length 128bit

2.2.4. Scan
Item Specification
Scan method Color CCDM, Dual Scan
Compatibility TWAIN(USB & N/W), WIA(Only for USB)
Color Mode Mono / Gray / Color
• Simplex 50 ipm @ 300 dpi
Scan Speed
• Duplex 70 ipm @ 300 dpi
Optical 600 x 600 ppi
Resolution
Enhanced 4,800 x 4,800 ppi
Halftone 256 levels
Max. Document Width Max. 216mm (8.5")
Effective Scan Width Max. 208mm (8.2inch)
Scan Size
Max. Document
Max. 356mm (Legal)
Length
Color 24 bits
Scan Depth • 1bit for Linearity & Halftone
Mono
• 8Bits for Gray scale
Multi-page Scan Platen & ADF
HDD Yes (Document Box)
USB Yes
Email Yes
Client(NetScan) Yes
Scan-to
SMB Yes
FTP Yes
HTTP(S) No
Multi Destination No
User Based Individual (Fax+Email) : 200
Email, Fax,
Fax Group : 100, E-mail Group : 200
Server 10
Searching
Address Book
Editing
Basic Feature Deleting
Grouping
import, export
Mixed Document Yes
Scan Preset Yes
Delayed Send Yes
Scan Setting
Job Done notice Yes
Job Recall Yes
OCR Yes

2.2.5. Copy
Item Specification
• CLX-8640ND
• Color Simplex : up to 38 cpm in A4 (40 cpm in Letter)
• Mono Simplex: up to 38 cpm in A4 (40 cpm in Letter)
• Color Duplex : up to 31 cpm in A4 (33 cpm in Letter)
SDMC (Single • Mono Duplex : up to 31 cpm in A4 (33 cpm in Letter)
Copy Speed (Dual
Document Multiple
Scan) • CLX-8650ND
Copy) @ 300 dpi
• Color Simplex : up to 48 cpm in A4 (51 cpm in Letter)
• Mono Simplex: up to 48 cpm in A4 (51 cpm in Letter)
• Color Duplex : up to 40 cpm in A4 (42 cpm in Letter)
• Mono Duplex : up to 40 cpm in A4 (42 cpm in Letter)
From Ready Less than 9 sec
FCOT (B&W and From Sleep 15 sec
Color) • Less than 64 sec @ Panel Soft Power
From Coldboot
• Less than 90 sec @ Mechanical Power
• 25% ~ 400% in 1% increments (Platen)
Zoom Range
• 25% ~ 200% in 1% increments (DADF)
Multi Copy 1~999
• Platen: Scan 600 x 600 dpi , Printing 600 x 600 dpi
Text
• DADF: Scan 300 x 300 dpi, Printing 600 x 600 dpi
• Platen: Scan 600 x 600 dpi, Printing 600 x 600 dpi
Text/Photo
Original Type
• Platen: Scan 600 x 600 dpi , Printing 600 x 600 dpi
Megazine
• Platen: Scan 600 x 600 dpi, Printing 1200 x 1200 dpi
Photo
Original Type Factory Default Color copy mixed mode
Auto Color Yes
Full Color Yes
Color Setting Twin Color N/A
Single Color N/A
B&W Yes
Platen Legal (8.5" x 14")
Max. Original Size
DADF Legal (8.5" x 14")

Item Specification
Multi Copy 1~999
Automatic Paper
Yes - Patially(Legal, A4/Letter, A5 )
Selection
Manual Paper Selection Yes
Multi-page Copy Platen & ADF
Using Platen, DADF
• 1→1
• 1→2Book
• 1→2Calendar
• 2→1Book
Duplex Copy
• 2→1Calendar
• 2→2Book
• 2Calendar→2Calendar
• 2Book→2Calendar
• 2Calendar→2Book
Darkness Control 11 levels
Basic Copy Automatic Background
Auto, Erase(4 levels), Enhance(2 levels)
Suppression
Collation Copy Yes
* Zoom Range : 25% to 400% in Platen, 25% to 200% in ADF
* Preset [Original(100%)]
[Auto Fit] [A4 → A5(71%)]
[LGL→LTR(78%)]
Reduce & Enlarge [LGL→A4(83%)]
[A4→LTR(94%)]
[EXE→LTR(104%)]
[A5 → A4(141%)] 25%, 50%,150%, 200%, 400%
[Custom:25-400%)]
• Not Collated
• Collated (This is collated output without Staple)
Output • Collated and Offset (This is collated output and offset without
Staple)
• Staple (This is staple and Offset)
Proof Copy No
N-Up 2up, 4-up
ID Card Copy Yes (Platen only)
Poster Copy No
Clone Copy No
Other Features
Booklet No
Covers No
Transparencies No
Book Copy No
Interrupt Copy Yes

Item Specification
Erase Edge No
Save to File Yes
Margin Shift No
Book Center Erase Yes
Form Copy No
Image Watermark Copy Yes
Page Numbering No
Time & Date Stamp Yes
ID Stamp Yes
2.2.6. Fax
Item Specification
Compatibility ITU-T G3, Super G3
Communication System PSTN/PABX
Modem Speed 33.6Kbps
TX Speed 3sec (Mono/Standard/ECM-MMR, ITU-T G3 No.1 Chart)
Compression MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG
Color Fax Yes
ECM Yes
Std 203*98dpi
Fine 203*196dpi
Resolution (Mono)
S.Fine Photo No
S.Fine 300*300dpi
Std 200*200dpi
Resolution (Color) Fine 200*200dpi
S.Fine 200*200dpi
Std 1.5sec/LTR
Scan speed Fine 4sec/LTR
S.Fine Depends on Document
Handset No
On hook Dial Yes
Search Yes(Phone Book)
Speed Dial 200 locations
Group Dial Max. 100 Groups (Max. locations per 1 Group : 200 locations)
Telephone Features
TAD I/F Yes
Tone/Pulse Yes
Pause Yes
Auto Redial Yes
Last Number Redial Yes

Item Specification
Distinctive Ring No
Caller ID Yes
External Phone
Yes
Interface
Mail Box No
Voice Request No
TTI Yes
RTI Yes
Polling No
Earth/Recall No
Auto Reduction Yes
SMS No
Functions Multi-send Same as Group Dial Capacity.

Delayed Send Yes
Memory RX Yes
Secure Rx (<-secure
Yes
TX)
Time Secured Fax No
Relay Transmission
No
(ITU-T Mail Box)
Priority Transmission Yes
Batch Transmission No
Searching Yes
Storing Yes
Editing Yes
Address Book Basic
Deleting Yes
Feature
Grouping Yes
Chaining No
import, export Yes
Search condition No
Favorites Button No
Address Book
Advanced Curent Sending ,
Yes(Curent Sending )
Receiving Tel number
LDAP Yes
Check the Success or
Yes
Fail & Error
Re-Faxing from
memory in case of Yes
Sending fax failed Fax
Management
Re-Faxing in case of
Yes
failed page.
Delete in memory after
Yes
sending completely

Item Specification
Separator Sheet No
Insert the stamp Yes(Option -On,Off) Rx Time ,ID, Page
Fax Receiving Feature/
Number of Printing
Printing the Rx No
Copies
Document
Revers order printing No
tray selection Yes
Tx/Rx Journal Yes
Confirmation 2 types available (with Image TCR, w/o image TCR,Mono Only)
Report & List Print out
Auto Dial List Yes
System Data List List all user setting
Ring Volume Yes(Off,Low,MED,HIGH)
Key Volume Yes(On,Off)
Sound Control
Speaker Yes(On,Off)
Alarm Volume Yes(On,Off)
Junk Fax barrier Yes
Security Receive Yes
Battery Backup Permanently stored on HDD
Send Yes
Duplex
Receive Yes
Receive Mode Fax, TEL, Ans/Fax
Battery Backup HDD Store, 500 jobs
Fax Forward to FAX Yes(On/Off), both Sent and Received
Fax Forward to e-mail Yes
Broadcasting up to 209 locations
Cover page No
HDD Yes
USB No
Fax Yes
Email Yes
Fax-to Client No
SMB Yes
FTP Yes
HTTP(S) No
Multi-destination No

2.2.7. Paper Handling
Item Specification
• 520-sheet cassette Tray (20 lb or 80g/m²),
Standard Capa.
• 100-sheet MP tray (20 lb or 80g/m²)
Max. Input Capa. MP + 4 Tray 2,180 sheets @ 20lb or 80g/m²
Max. Size 216 x 1200 mm (8.5" x 47.2"), Banner size
Printing Min. Size 98 x 148 mm (3.85" x 5.83")
Margin(T/B/L/R) 4 mm, 4 mm, 4 mm, 4 mm
• Plain paper : 100 sheets
Capacity • Envelopes : 10 sheets
• Labels : 10 sheets
98 x 148 mm (3.85" x 5.83") ~ 216 x 356 mm (8.5" x 14")
Media sizes
Banner Size Printing : 216mm x 1200mm
Printer Default, Plain Paper, Thick Paper, Thin Paper, Bond Paper, Color
Media type Paper, CardStock, Labels, Envelope, Preprinted, Letterhead, Recycled
Paper, Cotton, Archive, User set
• Thin: 60-75 g/m²
• Colored 1: 75-84 g/m²
• Coloerd 2: 85-10 5 g/m²
• Pre-Printed 1: 75-84 g/m²
• Cotton: 75-90 g/m²
• Plain Paper: 76-84 g/m²
• Thick 1: 85-110 g/m²
• Thick 2: 111-130 g/m²
MP Tray • Recycle: 60-80 g/m²
• Envelope: 75-90 g/m²
• Gloss 1: 105-130 g/m²
• Gloss 2: 131-220g/m²
Media weight
• Extra Thick 1: 111-130 g/m²
• Extra Thick 2: 131-170g/m²
• Cardstock: 171-220 g/m²
• Bond 1: 84 g/m²
• Bond 2: 85-110 g/m²
• Bond 3: 111-130 g/m²
• Bond 4: 131-220 g/m²
• Archive 1: 84 g/m²
• Archive 2: 85-110 g/m²
• Archive 3: 111-130 g/m²
• Archive 4: 131-220 g/m²
• Transparency: 138-146 g/m²
• Label: 120-150 g/m²
Sensing Paper empty sensor

Item Specification
Capacity 520 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²)
Tentative Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5,
Media sizes
Envelope C5, Custom
Tentative Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Bond, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Envelope,
Media types
CardStock, Thick, Cotton, Colored, Archive
• Thin: 60-75 g/m²
• Colored 1: 75-84 g/m²
• Coloerd 2: 85-105 g/m²
• Thick 1: 85-110 g/m²
• Thick 2: 111-130 g/m²
• Recycle: 60-80 g/m²
Standard Cassette Tray • Gloss 1: 105-130 g/m²
Media weight
• Gloss 2: 131-163 g/m²
• Bond 1: 84 g/m²
• Bond 2: 85-110 g/m²
• Bond 3: 111-130 g/m²
• Bond 4: 131-163 g/m²
• Archive 2: 85-110 g/m²
• Archive 3: 111-130 g/m²
• Archive 4: 131-163 g/m²
• H/W Install Detect: Yes
• Paper Empty & Low Level Detect: Yes
Sensing
• Paper Type Detect: No
• Paper Size Detect: Legal, Letter, A4, B5, A5, Folio and others
Capacity 520 sheets @ 20lb (80 g/m²), drawer type
Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Envelope
Media sizes
Optional Cassette Tray C5, Custom
Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Bond, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Envelope, CardStock,
Media types
Thick, Cotton, Colored, Archive

Item Specification
• Thin: 60-75 g/m²
• Colored 1: 75-84 g/m²
• Coloerd 2: 85-105 g/m²
• Thick 1: 85-110 g/m²
• Thick 2: 111-130 g/m²
• Recycle: 60-80 g/m²
• Gloss 1: 105-130 g/m²
Media weight
• Gloss 2: 131-163 g/m²
• Bond 1: 84 g/m²
• Bond 2: 85-110 g/m²
• Bond 3: 111-130 g/m²
• Bond 4: 131-163 g/m²
• Archive 2: 85-110 g/m²
• Archive 3: 111-130 g/m²
• Archive 4: 131-163 g/m²
• H/W Install Detect: Yes
• Paper Empty & Low Level Detect: Yes
Sensing
• Paper Type Detect: No
• Paper Size Detect: Legal, Letter, A4, B5, A5, Folio and others
Capacity
• 500 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²)
(FaceDown)
Output Stacking
Offset Stacking N/A
Output Full sensing Yes
Capacity • Main tray : 500 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²)
(FaceDown) • Top tray : 100 sheets @ 20lb (80g/m²)
2-bin Finisher Offset Stacking Yes
Stapling Method 1 Position
Sensing Output Full sensing: Yes Cartridge Empty Detect : Yes
Supporting Yes
Throughput 85% from Cassette, 30% from MP tray
Automatic Duplex Media sizes 148.5 x 210 mm - 215.9 x 355.6 mm
Media types Plain/Thick Paper
Media weight 60 to 163 g/m²

Item Specification
Capacity 100 sheets ( 20lb, 80 g/m²)
2-sided Document
Yes (Reversing) -> Dual scan
Scanning
• Width: 145 ~ 216 mm (5.7"~8.5")
• Length :
Document Size • 145 ~ 356 mm (5.7" ~ 14.0") for Single page scan
ADF
• 145 ~ 400 mm (5.7" ~ 15.7") for Multi pages scan
• Bank Check Scan : 69.6 mm x 152.4 mm
Document Weight 12.5~28 lb
• Paper empty detect : Yes
Sensing • Paper width detect : Yes
• Paper length detect : Yes
2.2.8. Consumables
Items Model Name Life

Toner Cartridge Black CLT-K659S 20,000 standard pages
Yellow CLT-Y659S 20,000 standard pages
Magenta CLT-M659S 20,000 standard pages
Cyan CLT-C659S 20,000 standard pages
Drum Unit Black CLT-R659K 40,000 pages (3 sheets/job)
Yellow CLT-R659Y 40,000 pages (3 sheets/job)
Magenta CLT-R659M 40,000 pages (3 sheets/job)
Cyan CLT-R659C 40,000 pages (3 sheets/job)
Waste Toner Container CLT-W659 20,000 pages

2.2.9. Maintenance Parts
Items Part Code Life

Developer Unit Black JC96-06327A 300,000 impressions (3 sheets/ job)
Yellow JC96-06324A 300,000 impressions (3 sheets/ job)
Magenta JC96-06325A 300,000 impressions (3 sheets/ job)
Cyan JC96-06326A 300,000 impressions (3 sheets/ job)
Fuser Unit • JC91-01121A (220V) 150,000 impressions
• JC91-01120A (110V)
ITB Unit JC96-06322A 150,000 impressions
Transfer roller Assy JC95-01622A 150,000 impressions
Pick up/ Reverse/ Forward roller (Tray JC93-00616A 150,000 impressions
1,2,3,4)
DADF Pick-Up roller Assy JC97-04098A 150,000 impressions
DADF Retard roller Assy JC97-04135A 150,000 impressions
NOTE
Depending on the print patterns and job mode used, the lifespan may differ.

2.2.10. Options
Image Item Model Name CLX-8650ND CLX-8640ND
Second Cassette Feeder

CLX-DSK20M/SEE Yes Yes
with stand
Triple Cassette Feeder CLX-S8640T/SEE Yes Yes
2bin-Finisher CLX-FIN25S/SEE Yes Yes
CLX-FAX170/XXX
NOTE
Fax kit Yes Yes
XXX : SEE, XEE,
XEG, XEU
FDI (Foreign Device

SCX-KIT20F/SEE Yes Yes
Interface) kit
Staple Cartridge SCX-STP000/SEE Yes Yes

Card Reader Cover JC95–01835B Yes Yes

2.3. System Configuration
1) Front View
v~
ev ew ex
v}
ew u
v| ey wv
v{
vz
ez
vy e{
vx e|
vw
ww
vv e}
e~
ev u
1 Duplex automatic document feeder cover 13 Front door

2 Duplex automatic document feeder width guides 14 Front door handle
3 Duplex automatic document feeder input tray 15 Center tray
4 Duplex automatic document feeder output tray 16 Control panel
5 Right door 17 USB port
6 Right door handle 18 Scanner glass
7 Multi-purpose tray handle 19 White sheet
8 Triple Cassette Feeder handle 20 Multi-purpose tray paper width guide
9 Triple Cassette Feeder right bottom door 21 Multi-purpose tray support
10 Standard tray (Tray 1) 22 Second Cassette Feeder with stand
11 Triple Cassette Feeder (Tray2, Tray3, Tray4)
12 Standard tray (Tray 1)

2) Inner view
ey
ev
ez
ew
ex
1 Toner cartridges
2 Waste toner container
3 LSU window cleaning stick
4 Imaging units cover
5 Imaging units
3) Rear View
w
x
|
}

1 USB host port

2 USB port
3 Network port
4 Dummy for Fax Kit
5 Dummy for 2Bin Finisher
6 Dummy for FDI (Foreign Device Interface)
7 Power-switch
8 Power receptacle
View with Standard 2Bin Finisher (optional)
ey ez
ex
ew
ev
1 Standard 2Bin Finisher

2 Finishing tray
3 Top tray
4 Standard 2Bin Finisher front door
5 Standard 2Bin Finisher front door handle
6 Staple

System Layout
18
17
1
16
2
15
3
4
14
13
6
7
12
9
11
10
1 DADF Unit 10 Optional Tray

2 Duplex Guide 11 Pick up/Forward/Reverse Roller
3 Output Tray 12 MP(Multi-Purpose) Tray
4 Toner Cartridge 13 2nd Transfer Roller Unit
5 ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Unit 14 Fuser Unit
6 Drum Unit 15 Exit Unit
7 Developer Unit 16 Scanner (Platen Unit)
8 LSU (Laser Scanning Unit) 17 DADF output tray
9 1st Tray 18 DADF input tray

Paper Path

2.4. Feeding System
2.4.1. Cassette
The cassette stores papers. Paper size is set using the Size Guides in each tray.
• Specification
- Structure : Drawer Type
- Capacity : 520 Sheets ( 80 g/m² paper standard)
- Paper
▪ Plain paper : A5, A4, B5, Letter, Statement, Legal
▪ Special Paper : C5
- Weight : plain paper 60~163 g/m²
- Plate knock up lift type : Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor

2.4.2. Pick-Up Unit
When the cassette is inserted and the LEVER FRICTION rotates, the pick up roller contacts the surface of the paper.
The reverse roller serves to make sure that a single sheet of paper to the feed roller. The shaft of the reverse roller is
driven by gear in the opposite direction of the paper path.

2.4.3. Registration Unit
The registration(Regi.) roller is driven by the Regi./MP motor. The Regi. clutch is located between the Regi. clutch and
Regi./MP motor, and it controls ON/OFF of the registration roller in order to match paper and an image on the drum at the
predetermined registration point.
■ Specification
1) Skew in simplex
• Top Skew : 1.5 mm
• Side Skew : 2.0 mm
2) Dog Ear, Trees, Nicks, Wrinkling
• Special Media : 1/500
3) Margin
• Top Margin : 4.23 ± 1.5 mm ( Tray3, 4, 5 : 4.23 ± 2.0 mm )
• Side Margin : 4.23 ± 1.5 mm ( Tray3, 4, 5 : 4.23 ± 2.0 mm )
• Duplex Top Margin : 4.23 ± 2.0 mm
• Duplex Side Margin : 4.23 ± 2.0 mm

2.4.4. MPF(Multi-Purpose Feeder) Unit
The MPF Unit allows feeding of specialty media stock, envelopes, and custom size paper.
When the paper is loaded on MP tray, STOPPER - PAPER, LEVEL - SENSOR detect the paper. When a MP printing job
starts, the pick up roller is moving down. The feed roller and reverse roller separate the top sheet of paper from the stack.
The reverse roller rotates in the opposite direction of the feed roller.
a) Specification
• Capacity : 100 sheets (80g/m² paper standard)
• Media Size : Max 8.5” ×14” / Min 3.87”×5.8”
• Media Weight : Plain paper 60 ~ 220 g/m²
• Feeding Speed : 46 ppm (Letter)

2.4.5. Exit Unit
The Exit Unit sends the transferred paper from the fuser unit to the exit tray.
In case of duplex printing mode, the Invert gate is down to rotates the return roller in reverse and the paper is transferred
to the duplex unit.

2.4.6. Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit receives the paper from exit unit and sends it to transfer unit again.

2.5. Fuser unit
This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper, by applying heat and pressure to complete
the fusing process. This machine uses an instant fusing system. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventional
fusing and pressure roller system.
1) Halogen Lamp
The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One heats the center of the fusing belt, the other heats the end of axial direction.
These halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt. Each lamp has its coil in a different location. The coil of
the center heater lamp is in the center, those of the side heater lamp are on both sides. The lamp s are fixed inside of
the fusing belt. When rotating the fusing belt, these lamps does not rotate.
2) Fusing Belt
The fusing belt gets heat from the halogen lamp and transfer it to toner and paper. The fusing belt consists of three
thin-layers. The thin fusing belt reduces warming up time and mode changing time. To prevent the fusing belt from
adhering to the toner, the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. There is a Nip inside the fusing belt. To maintain the
proper Nip between the fusing belt and pressure roller, the spring is used.
3) Pressure Roller
The pressure roller is a rubber roller which ensures proper nip width between the pressure roller and fusing belt. It is
driven by the driving system and drives the fusing belt.
4) Non-Contact(NC) Sensor
NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors), located near the center and the end of the fusing belt, control the temperature
of the fusing belt.
5) Thermostat
Thermostats cut off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the fusing belt becomes
abnormally hot as a result of problems such as NC sensor malfunction. These thermostats are used to prevent abnormal
operation. When the thermostat is triggered, it must be replaced (as well as the other damaged parts in the fuser unit).

2.6. Image Creation
2.6.1. Printing process overview
This machine uses four imaging units and four laser beams for color printing. Each Imaging unit consists of a Drum
unit and Developer unit.
Each Drum unit has an OPC drum, Charge roller, Cleaning brush, Cleaning blade.
The OPC drum [A] is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed by the light from the LSU (Laser Scanning unit) [B].
The light produced by the laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum. The negatively
charged toner is attracted to the latent drum image due to an electric field. The toner (real image) on each OPC drum is
moved to the transfer belt[C] by the positive bias applied to the first transfer roller. All four toners (color image) are
transferred to the paper by a positive charge applied to the second transfer roller[D].
1) OPC drum charge : The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.
2) Laser exposure : Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.
3) Development : The developing roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum surface. This
machine uses four independent imaging units (one for each color).
4) Transfer :
• Image transfer : The first transfer rollers opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums to the transfer
belt. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the belt.
• Paper transfer : The second transfer roller transfers the toner from the transfer belt to the media.
5) Cleaning for OPC drum : The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface after image
transfer to the paper.
6) Quenching for OPC drum : Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the end
of every job.
7) Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt : The cleaning brush and blade clean the belt surface. The grounding roller
inside the transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.

2.6.2. Imaging Unit
2.6.2.1. Imaging Unit Overview
This machine uses the tandem type image processing engine. It makes 4 color developing during one paper to increase
the productivity for color printing.
Each processing unit consists of the Drum unit and the Developer unit. The Developer units are not exchangeable but the
Drum units are exchangeable. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.2 mm).
The developing gap between a drum and the corresponding magnetic roller cannot be adjusted. The ID chip is the sub part of
the Drum unit. It stores the count information and several data.

2.6.2.2. Drum drive
Each color OPC and Magnetic roller is driven by each color motor. The OPC Drum and Magnetic roller are supplied with
power from the coupling.
The BLDC motor maintains the constant speed. So, the speed sync for each color depends on the BLDC motor without
the additional device.
Phase sync for each OPC runout prints the pattern on the ITB and is adjusted by the data automatically.

2.6.2.3. Developer Unit
This machine uses a dual-component development system and has four Developer units. Each new unit contains 220g of
magnetic toner carrier. The developer in each unit is supplied to the magnetic(development) roller[A] by the two mixing
augers[B]. The diameter of the magnetic roller is 18 mm.
Each Developer unit has a TC(Toner Carrier) sensor[C]. They are used for controlling the operating range of toner density.
Drum Unit has the CRUM that stores the information for corresponding the Drum unit.

■ Developer Circulation
Two mixing augers[A] circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer in order to mix the developer
and toner well.
This occurs at the following times :
• During warming-up
• During toner supply job
• During development job
If the developer unit is stored at temperature above 50°C (122°F), it does not works normally. The toner in developer
unit is easy to harden at temperature above 50°C (122°F).

2.6.3. ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt) Unit
2.6.3.1. ITB Unit overview
The toner on the four drums is moved to the ITB by the first transfer roller (T1 roller).
The image overlapped by four colors is moved to the paper by the second transfer roller (T2 roller). The remaining toners
are removed by the cleaning blade and moved to the waste toner container.
This process is done with one rotation of the ITB. The arrow on the diagram shows the direction of ITB rotation. The
rotation is made by the friction between the drive roller and transfer belt. The tension roller provides tension to prevent slip.
There are three ACR(Auto Color Registration) sensor and one photo sensor. Two of them are for the line position adjustment
and the other is for process control. One photo sensor controls the position of the first transfer roller.
1 ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)

2 1st Transfer Roller
3 ITB Drive Roller
4 Tension Roller
5 Photo Sensor
6 Cleaning Blade
7 ACR Sensor
8 2nd Transfer Roller
9 Auger (Toner collection Auger)
10 Drum Unit

2.6.3.2. Transfer belt drive
The ITB drive motor[A] drives the transfer belt[B] by using gears and the ITB drive roller[C].

2.6.3.3. Transfer belt cleaning
The ITB-cleaner removes toner (during printing) and the ACR sensor patterns (during process control or automatic line
position adjustment) from the belt. Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation.
The cleaning blade[A] in the ITB cleaner always contacts the transfer belt[B], and removes the used toner from the belt.
Then the toner collection auger[C] transports the waste toner to the waste toner container.
The film[D] on the ITB cleaner protects against toner contamination. The driving power by driver roller is transferred to the
tension roller[E] and the toner collection auger gear[G] drives the gear[F], and collects the toner.

2.7. Laser scanning unit (LSU)
2.7.1. LSU overview
LSU consists of 1 polygon motor and 4 laser diodes(LD) units and forms a latent image on the surface of 4 OPC drums. For
this process, LSU has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, 2 F-Theta Lens, 2 reflective mirrors on optical path for each color.
This LSU adopted the cross scan type scanning. K Color and C Color scan the laser beam from the rear to the front, M Color
and Y Color scan the laser beam from the front to the rear.
1 PBA-LSU LD
2 Motor Polygon
3 Lens-Ftheta A
4 Lens-Ftheta B
5 PBA-LSU PD

2.7.2. Laser Scanning Optical path
The laser beam from the LSU is placed at intervals of 78mm for each color. All colors uses the same polygon motor for
oblique incidence.
LD Unit Laser Diode : Single Beam

driving IC : for Dual LD
Polygon Motor 36,064.9 rpm
Process speed 305.35 mm/sec
H/W interface Interface with machine :
• FFC : 60 pin
• Pressure welding type 8 pin

2.7.3. Laser synchronizing detectors
The machine has two beam detector sensor boards (PD PBA). They are located at each corner of the laser optics-housing unit.
The two PD PBA detect the following :
• [A]: Scanning start position for black

• [B]: Scanning start position for magenta
This machine recognizes each color from the time that they are detected.
■ Main Scan Start Detection

4 beams are detected by the PD PBA at the scanning start point and create the horizontal sync (Hsync) signal. Data is
scanned by Hsync.
The arrow in the above diagram shows the data scanning direction for each color. Black (& Cyan) and Yellow (& Magenta)
use the same polygon motor scanning in opposite directions.

2.8. Drive System
2.8.1. Drive Motors
The following diagram displays the locations of the printer drive motors.
No. Motor Motor type Qty Function

1 OPC / DEVE BLDC 4 OPC/DEVE driving
2 ITB BLDC 1 ITB driving
3 T1 Dis/En PM-STEP 1 T1 Dis/Engage
4 PH BLDC 1 Regi / MP / Feed / Pick-up driving
E-CLT 1 Pick-up driving control

No. Motor Motor type Qty Function

5 Fuser/ Exit BLDC 1 Fuser / Exit / Fuser Mode
DC 1 Fuser Mode driving control
6 Cst Lift DC 1 Cst Lift driving
7 Toner Supply DC 4 Toner transfer in toner cartridge driving Duct
8 WTB PM-STEP 1 Waste toner container leveling
9 ITB Auger PM-STEP 1 Waste toner transfer in ITB
10 Shutter-ACR DC 1 ACR Open/Close

2.8.2. Main Drive Unit (OPC, DEVE, ITB, T1 DIS_ENG)
Front View
Rear View

2.8.3. PH(Paper Handling) Drive
The following is a diagram of the PH drive:
Power Train • Regi. MP, Feed : BLDC driving, Clutch driving control
• Pick-up : BLDC driving, Clutch driving control
• 1 BLDC → 2 Gear → 3 Gear → 4 Gear → 5 Gear (Regi. driving)
• 1 BLDC → 2 Gear → 6 Gear (MP driving)
• 1 BLDC → 7 Gear → 8 Gear (Feed driving)
• 1 BLDC → 7 Gear → 8 Gear → 9 Clutch/Gear (Pick up driving)

2.8.4. Fuser_Exit Drive
The following is a diagram of the Fuser/Exit drive:
Power Train • Fuser/Exit : BLDC driving

• Fuser Mode : DC driving
• 1 BLDC → 2 Gear (Fuser driving)
• 1 BLDC → 3 Gear → 4 Gear (Exit driving)
• 5 DC → 6 Gear → 7 Gear → 8 Gear (Mode driving)

2.8.5. Cst Lift Drive
The following is a diagram of the Cst Lift drive:
Power Train Cst Lift : DC Motor driving

• 1 DC Motor → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Cst Lift driving)
2.8.6. Toner Supply Drive
The following is a diagram of the Toner Supply drive:
Power Train Duct & Cartridge driving

• 1 DC → 2 Gear → 3 Gear → 4 Gear (Toner Cartridge Auger driving)
• 1 DC → 2 Gear → 3 Gear → 5 Gear (Duct Auger driving)

2.8.7. Waste Toner Container Drive
The following is a diagram of the Waste Toner Container drive:
Power Train Step Motor & Gear-RDCN WTB : Waste Toner Container driving
• 1 PM Step → 2 Gear-RDCN WTB
2.8.8. ITB Auger Drive
The following is a diagram of the ITB Auger drive:
Power Train ITB Auger driving

• 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 3 Gear

2.9. Duplex Automatic Document Feeder(DADF)
2.9.1. DADF overview
Symbol Part Name Function

R1 DADF-Cover Stacker Paper input tray
R2 GUIDE-DOCU L&R Paper guide for skew prevention
R3 Pick-Up roller Picks up an original from the tray.
R4 Separation roller Separates an original from the tray and transfers it to the paper path.
R5 Reverse roller Prevent the multi-feeding.
R6 Regi. roller Aligns the leading edge of the paper for registration.
R7 Simplex Scan roller Feeds an original before simplex scanning.
R8 White-Bar Supports a stable scanning.
R9 Duplex Scan roller Feeds an original before duplex scanning.
R10 Duplex CCDM Scans a back page of original.
R11 Feed-Out roller Transfers a scanned original to the exit tray.

2.9.2. Electrical parts location

Ref. Description Part Code Controller board

S1 ADF-PBA JC92-02509A
S2 FAN JC31-00146A ADF-PBA
S3 STEP-MOTOR(PICK-UP) JC31-00163A ADF-PBA
S4 STEP-MOTOR(FEED) JC31-00163A ADF-PBA
S5 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(COVER-OPEN) 0604-001415 ADF-PBA
S6 CLUTCH-ELECTRIC JC47-00033A ADF-PBA
S7 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(PAPER-WIDTH) 0604-001415 ADF-PBA
S8 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(PICK-UP) 0604-001415 ADF-PBA
S9 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(PAPER-DETECT) 0604-001415 ADF-PBA
S10 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(PAPER-FEED) 0604-001415 ADF-PBA
S11 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(REGI) 0604-001415 ADF-PBA
S12 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(SIMPLEX SCAN) 0604-001381 ADF-PBA
S13 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(DUPLEX SCAN) 0604-001381 ADF-PBA
S14 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(FEED-OUT) 0604-001415 ADF-PBA
S15 PHOTO-INTERRUPTER(PAPER-LENGTH) 0604-001415 ADF-PBA
S16 DUAL-CCDM PBA JC92-02537A

2.9.3. DADF Drive System
DADF drive system consists of two motors and one clutch to transfer paper.
Two step motors drive the system for simplex and duplex job.
• Pick up motor is used for picking up and transferring paper.

• Feed motor and clutch are used for regi. scan, feed.
a) DADF Original Pick-Up Drive

DADF Original Pick-Up Drive consists of Pick-up Motor Assy, Pick-up Assy, Guide Pick-up Assy, and Cover-Open Assy
• Operation Procedure
1) Checks a paper detection.
2) Checks the original width size.
3) Holds the original not to be moved in paper path before pick up driving.
4) Starts pick up driving.
5) Separates an original.

b) DADF Original Regi. Drive

DADF Original Regi Drive consists of Feed Motor, Electric Clutch, Regi roller, Regi-Idle roller, Resi sensor
1) Original is detected by Regi-Actuator.
2) Original aligns for registration.
3) Original passes the regi. roller by clutch on/off.
c) Original Scanning and Feed-Out Drive

Feed-Out Drive consists of Feed motor, Timing-Belt, Simplex&Duplex scan roller, White-Bar Assy, Simplex&Duplex
Scan sensor.
1) The power from the feed motor is transferred to simplex and duplex roller.
2) When original passes the simplex scan actuator, simplex scan starts. White-Bar functions to prevent the wrinkle.
3) When original passes the duplex scan actuator, duplex scan starts.
4) Original is transferred to exit tray.

2.10. Hardware Configuration
The CLX-8640/8650 series Electrical Circuit System consists of the following :
• Main Controller (Main board)

• OPE Controller
• DADF Controller
• HVPS board1, 2
• SMPS board
• FDB board
Diagram of the CLX-8640/8650 Series Electrical Circuit

OP E
7” TFT
TCF
DADF S CANNER m DDR
MODEM S CF AM3715
FINIS HER 256MB
(S iLab ) MICOM MICOM CCD/AFE NAND US B HOS T
256MB P ORT2
Debug1 US B US B
CCD I/F
UART SPI
P HY
Debug2 HUB
MS OK
LCD IP
E 2 P ROM SPI SPI UART
CON Re CP 4
32KB
Ch0
I2C
US B US B
I2C I2C HOS T US B HOS T
HUB
Ch1
To n er CP U US B HOS T
GL850
Deve
(C4N) US B
GP IO DEV US B DEVICE US B DEVICE
GP IO
CLUTCH
LS U ETHE RGMII P HY 1Gb p s N/W
S OLENOID P WM P WM S ATA NAND DDR
HP VC R
S ENS ORS
600Mhz
UART
32-bit
8-bit
S ATA
FAN
S TEP MOT DDR3 NAND
AVR
BLDC MOT 1GB 128MB
DC MOT
24V
5V
HVP S LS U 320GB
FDB S MP S
2.5”
The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller and scan controller.
The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port, and it receives copy data from the
Scan Controller. It takes this information and generates printable video bitmap data. It controls all modules required to
print, that is, LSU, HVPS, FAN, Fuser, etc.
The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through UART. It communicates with the toner
cartridge and drum/developer unit through I2C to check their life.
The main controller adopted Dure Core CPU 1GHZ, DDR3 1GB memory, Flash NAND 128MB, 320GB SATA HDD to
control the engine driving, video signal processing, interface, etc. successfully.

A MICOM at the main controller controls the fuser lamp on/off and system power according to an optimized energy-saving
algorithm for optimal efficiency. It also communicates with the OPE Controller through the USB 2.0 protocol to display
the system information on LCD.
The OPE Controller displays the status of the system by using the WSVGA TFT LCD in response to user actions or
the main controller.
The soft power switch in the KEY SUB BOARD is used to safely shut down the system power.
The DADF Controller controls some mechanisms required to scan by feeder continuously and communicates with the main
controller to synchronize the scanning timing.
The HVPS board generates high-voltage channels and controls it. The FDB board controls the fuser lamp On/Off. The
SMPS board generates the 5V, 24V for system power.

Circuit Board Locations

The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

2.10.1. Main Controller
The main controller consists of the main processor(Chorus4N), memory(DDR3 1GB), flash(128MB), 1G Ethernet PHY,
USB2.0 HUB, Micom(Power/Fuser control), Scan/Video/UI/FAX signal interface connection, motor driving IC, Engine
signal interface connection, power interface.
The main processor (Dual Core 1GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display and communicates the various devices. The
HDD is connected to the main controller by SATA cable and to the other device (DADF, TCF, Finisher, Modem) by UART.
1) Main Controller Diagram

TCF DADF S CANNER
MODEM S CF
AVR FINIS HER OP E
(S iLab ) Mico m Mico m CCD/AFE 7” TFT
m DDR
CCD I/F
AM3715
Debg1 256MB
SPI
UART NAND
Debg2
MS OK 256MB
E 2 P ROM 32KB US B US B US B HOS T
XCRUM SPI LCD IP P HY HUB P ORT2
I2C GP IO SPI UART
Ch0
CONT Re CP 4
I2C CHORUS 4-N

Ch1
Ch2
US B US B
CORTEX-A9 CORTEX-A9 ARM946
HOS T US B HOS T HUB US B HOS T
Deve To n er 1GHz 1GHz 250MHz
YMCK YMCK GL850 CARD READER
32/32KB 32/32KB 8/8KB
US B
S TEP MOT L2 1MB SRAM 256KB DEV US B DEVICE US B DEVICE
BLDC MOT
GP IO
DC MOT
P WM LS U DDR3 NAND ETHE RGMII P HY 1Gb p s N/W
S ATA
CLUTCH MTR HP VC BUS BUS R
S OLENOID
600Mh z
S ATA
32-b it
S ENS ORS P WM ü Real Time Co n tro l

NAND . S can /En g in e/Fax
DDR3 320GB
HVP S LS U
FAN 1GB 128MB 2.5”
ü XOA Lin u x

2) Main Controller Connection Information
1 2 4 5 7 9
10
8
34 3 6 11
33 12
32 13
36
14
31
30
29
35
28
27
26 24 23 15
20 17
25 22 21 19 18 16
• Connection
1 FRONT COVER 13 CARD READER 25 SCF IF
2 PLATEN CCDM 14 Giga bit RJ-45 JACK 26 ACR/CTD/INNER TEMP
3 SCAN IF 15 LSU IF 27 SMPS(24v)
4 USB HOST (OPE) 16 FDI 28 SMPS(5v)
5 ADF CCDM 17 LSU P MOT 29 SMPS IF
5 USB HOST (OPE) 18 TC SENSOR IF 30 FUSER IF
6 OPE IF 19 OPC ORUM/DEVE 31 PICKUP IF
HOME
7 HVPS2 32 ITB MOTER/ENCODER
20 FINISHER IF
8 SATA IF 33 EXIT/FUSER MTR
21 DEVE MOTOR
9 SATA SIGNAL 34 SIDE COVER
22 ERASER LAMP
10 TONER BOTTLE IF 35 FAX IF
23 HVPS1
11 USB HOST JACK 36 SODIMM IF
24 FDB IF
12 USB DEVICE JACK
• Information
- Part Code : JC92–02516A
NOTE
This main board is for all models of the CLX-8640/8650 series
- Part Name : PBA-MAIN


3) MSOK
MSOK PBA is used to store all system information and consists of a serial flash memory, a EEPROM and a XCRUM. The
flash memory(4 MB byte) and EEPROM(256K bit) are used for all system operation (system parameter, device status,
tech information, and service information).
NOTE
When a main board needs to be exchanged, the MSOK PBA should be re-installed to the new main board to retain the system
information.
4) FAX JOINT PBA

The FAX JOINT PBA is used for interfacing between the main board and modem PBA. It uses UART for interface.
• Information
- Part Code : JC92-02439A
- Part Name : PBA-FAX JOINT
• Connection
1 Main PBA I/F connector
2 Modem Card I/F connector

5) Modem Card (Optional)

The modem card is used to transfer and receive the fax data through a telephone line. This PBA is controlled by the main
board and has two connectors, connectors, one for the telephone line connection and the other for an external phone
connection.
• Information
- Fax Kit model name : CLX-FAX170
- Part Code : JC92–02141B
- PBA name : PBA-FAX JOINT
• Connection
1 Fax JOINT I/F connector
2 TEL Line I/F connector
3 External Phone I/F connector
6) FDI (Optional)
The FDI Module as a option is used to track machine usage such as the number of print or copy pages for some special
users. This module interfaces to the main board.
• Information
- PBA name : PBA-SUB FDI
• Connection
1 Connector to Main controller

2.10.2. OPE controller
The OPE controller consists of an SOC ( TI AM3715-800MHz ), 256MB mobile DDR1 memory, 256MB NAND flash
memory, 7 inch touch LCD(800x480). The AM3715 is used to interface with users through the touch screen and some
buttons. The AM3715 is based on Android OS and supports the Graphic Accelation for better UI.
1) OPE controller diagram

2) OPE MAIN PBA
• Information
NOTE
This board is for all models of the CLX-8640/8650 series
- Part Name : OPE MAIN

• Connection
1 KEY PBA Interface connector
2 MAIN PBA POWER Interface connector
3 LCD DATA Interface connector
4 MAIN PBA USB Interface connector
5 LCD TSP Interface
6 LCD BACK LIGHT Interface
7 USB Host Port for Memory Stick

3) 7” TFT LCD, TOUCH SCREEN
• Information
- Part Name : LCD/TSP
4) OPE KEY PBA
• Information
- Part Name : OPE KEY
• Connection
1 Interface Connector to OPE Main
2 Magnetic Buzzer

2.10.3. ADF PBA
ADF PBA controls the DADF driving. It uses RENESAS’s uPD70F3824(48MHz Main Clock, 256KB Flash memory,
24KB RAM) and interfaces with MAIN PBA through UART communication. It has two Motor Driver IC’s for step motor
driving and controls one clutch, ten sensors.
• Information
- PBA Name : PBA-ADF
• Connection
1 PAPER DET1,2 / FEED,PICKUP ROLLER DET/ FEED DET SENSOR
2 EXIT SENSOR
3 COVER OPEN SENSOR / FAN I/F
4 PAPER LENGTH SENSOR
5 PAPER REGI SENSOR
6 PICKUP,FEED MOTOR / CLUTCH
7 SCAN I/F PBA
8 SCAN READ1,2 SENSOR

1) Scan I/F PBA

To drive platen motor, this board is for interface with main board, APS sensor, Home sensor, Cover open sensor, Fan. It also
functions as the joint PBA for ADF I/F and 24V, 5V, 3.3V power connectors.
• Information
- PBA Name : PBA-SCAN I/F
• Connection
1 MAIN PBA I/F
2 APS SENSOR PBA I/F
3 COVER OPEN SENSOR
4 SCAN MOTOR
5 SCAN FAN
6 CCD HOME SENSOR
7 ADF PBA I/F

2) APS I/F PBA

This board is supplied with power from SCAN I/F PBA. It detects the original size on platen glass and sends the signal
to main board through the SCAN I/F PBA.
• Information
- Part Code : JC92-02009B
- PBA Name : PBA-APS I/F
• Connection
1 APS SENSOR1,2
2 SCAN I/F PBA
3) PLATEN CCDM PBA

The function of this board is to convert the reflected light from an original document to electrical signals. It includes the
CCD, ADC, Logic IC, etc. The CCD converts the reflected light from an original document to three-color analog signals;
red, green, blue. ADC converts each analog signal to digital. And for high speed data transmission, the digital data signal is
converted to LVDS format with serialization.
This board handles all the conversion of an image reflected from the platen glass.
• Information
- PBA Name : PBA-CCDM PLATEN
• Connection
1 PBA-SCAN IF

4) ADF CCDM PBA

The function of this board is to convert the reflected light from an original document to electrical signals. It includes the
CCD, ADC, Logic IC, etc. The CCD converts the reflected light from an original document to three-color analog signals;
red, green, blue. ADC converts each analog signal to digital. And for high speed data transmission, the digital data signal is
converted to LVDS format with serialization.
This board handles all the conversion of an images as scanned from the Dual Scan ADF.
• Information
- PBA Name : PBA-CCDM ADF
• Connection
1 PBA-SCAN IF
5) White-LED(WLED) AL FRONT PBA

The WLED AL FRONT consists of two White-LED used as scanner light. The ADF CCDM and PLATEN CCDM uses
it each.
• Information
- PBA Name : PBA-WLED AL FRONT
• Connection
1 PBA-CCDM PLATEN
1 PBA-CCDM ADF

2.10.4. TCF(Triple Cassette Feeder) PBA
TCF PBA controls the TCF driving. It uses RENESAS’s uPD70F3824(48MHz Main Clock, 256KB Flash memory, 24KB
RAM) and interfaces with MAIN PBA through UART communication. It uses a extra IO-EXPANDER IC for IO expansion.
It has three Motor Driver IC’s for motor driving and controls one BLDC motor, three step motors, five clutches, nine sensors.
• Information
- PBA Name : PBA-TCF
• Connection
1 Set Interface
2 Empty Sensor1 / Lift Limit Sensor1 / Feed Sensor1 / Size Sensor1
3 Stpe Motor1 / Feed Clutch1 / Pick Up Clutch1
4 Empty Sensor 2,3 / Lift Limit Sensor 2,3 / Feed Sensor 2,3
5 Step Motor 2,3
6 Feed Clutch 2 / Pick Up Clutch 2,3
7 BLDC motor / Side Cover Open
8 Size Sensor 2,3

2.10.5. SMPS board
SMPS (Switching Mode Power Supply) board supplies electric power to the Main Board and other boards. The voltage
provided includes +5V, and +24V from a 110V/220V power input. It has safety protection modes for over current
and overload.
• Specification
General Input/ Output Voltage
1) AC 110V (110V ~ 127V)
2) AC 220V (220V ~ 240V)
3) Input Current: 10.0A (110V) / 8.0A (220V)
4) Output Power: 444W

- DC 5V : 60W / DC 24V : 384W
• Information
110V 220V
Part Code JC44-00149B JC44-00150B
Part Name SMPS Type 6 V1 SMPS Type 6 V2
• Connection
1 INPUT_AC
2 OUTPUT_24V1/2/3/4/5/6 (to DC POWER PBA)
3 SMPS Enable
4 OUTPUT_5V1/2/3/4 (to DC POWER PBA)

• Input / Output connector

- AC Input Connector (CN1)
PIN Assign PIN NO Description
1 AC_L
AC Input
2 AC_N
- DC Output Connector (CN2)

PIN Assign PIN Name Description
1 +24V1 Power
2 GND 24V Ground
3 +24V2 Power
4 +GND 24V Ground
5 +24V3 Power
6 GND 24V Ground
7 +24V4 Power
8 GND 24V Ground
9 +24V5 Power
10 GND 24V Ground
11 +24V6 Power
12 GND 24V Ground
- DC Output Connector (CN3)

1 +5V1 Power
2 GND 5V Ground
3 +5V2 Power
4 GND 5V Ground
5 +5V3 Power
6 GND 5V Ground
7 +5V4 Power
8 GND 5V Ground
- Signal Connector (CN4)

1 NC1 NC
2 NC2 NC
3 NC3 NC
4 RS24V 24V Remote Sense
5 24V_ON_OFF 24V _ON_OFF
6 RS5V 5V Remote Sense

2.10.6. Fuser Drive Board (FDB)
This board supplies the voltage to Fuser AC, Heater, Main board.
• Information
110V 220V
SEC CODE JC44-00210A JC44-00211A
PBA NAME FDB V1 FDB V2
• Connection
1 Heater I/F
2 Fuser AC
3 FDB I/F
4 Type 6
5 Main S/W
6 Inlet
7 Heater S/W

2.10.7. HVPS board
CLX-8640/8650 series have 2 HVPS boards.
1) HVPS board1
HVPS board1 generates 8 high-voltage channels, which include MHV(4), DEV(4).
• Information
- Part Name : HVPS
• Connection
1 DEV - K
2 DEV - C
3 DEV - M
4 DEV - Y
5 MHV - K
6 MHV - C
7 MHV - M
8 MHV - Y
9 MAIN I/F

2) HVPS board2
HVPS board2 generates 7 high-voltage channels, which include THV1(4), THV2(+/-), SAW.
• Information
- Part Name : HVPS
• Connection
1 THV1 - K
2 THV1- C
3 THV1- M
4 THV1 - Y
5 THV2 (+) / (-)
6 Saw Bias
7 MAIN I/F

2.10.8. Eraser PBA
Eraser PBA has one LED. The same PBAs are connected to one harness. This LED is used for erasing the negative
charges on the surface of the drum after printing.
• Information
- Part Name : ERASER ASSY
2.10.9. Fuser PBA
For counting the fuser unit life cycle, the Fuser PBA detects that the fuser unit is new or not.
• Information
- Part Name : FUSER PBA

2.10.10. CRUM PBA
The CRUM PBA includes CRU memory for developer unit, drum unit, toner cartridge life cycle counting.
• Information
• Part Code : JC92-02456A
• Part Name : TONER CRUM
2.10.11. Deve CRUM Joint PBA
The Deve Crum Joint PBA is the interface PBA between the imaging unit(drum unit and developer unit) and the machine.
• Information
• Part Code : JC92–02164A
• Part Name : DEVE CRUM JOINT
2.10.12. Toner CRUM Joint PBA
The Toner CRUM Joint PBA is the interface PBA between the toner cartridge and the machine.
• Information
• Part Name : PBA-TONER CRUM

2.10.13. ITB Encoder PBA
The ITB Encoder PBA provides ITB belt rotation speed information by using a specific photo interrupt sensor (Encoder
Sensor).
• Information
- Part Name : ITB ENCODER
• Connection
1 ITB Encoder Interface
2 ITB Engage Home Sensor
2.10.14. Toner Connector PBA
This board is connected to the TC sensor inside developer unit and waste toner sensor.
• Information
- Part Name : TONER_CONNECTOR

2.10.15. Connector PBA
This board is the interface PBA between the ACR sensor and feed sensor.
• Information
• Part Name : CONNECTOR
2.10.16. Side Joint PBA
The Side Joint PBA is the interface PBA for sensor signal in the side cover.
• Information
• Part Name : SIDE_JOINT

2.10.17. Finisher IF PBA
The Finisher IF PBA is the interface PBA between the finisher and the machine.
• Information
• Part Code : JC92–01885B
• Part Name : FINISHER_IF
2.10.18. Paper Size PBA
The Paper Size PBA detect the paper size in the cassette.
• Information
• Part Code : JC32–00013B
• Part Name : SENSOR-PAPER SIZE

2.10.19. Sensor locations
The following image shows the sensor locations of this machine.

Symbol Sensor Part Code Qty Controller Board

S1 REGI. 0604-001381 1 Main board
S2 DEVE HOME 0604-001415 4
S3 TNR DC MOT 0604-001415 4
S4 WTB 0604-001415 1
S5 LOW LEVEL 0604-001415 2
S6 FUSER HOME 0604-001415 1
S7 EXIT 0604-001415 1
S8 OUTBIN FULL 0604-001415 1
S9 CST EMPTY 0604-001415 1
S10 PICKUP LEVEL 0604-001415 1
S11 DPX JAM 0604-001415 1
S12 DPX READY 0604-001415 1
S13 MP EMPTY 0604-001415 1
S14 WIDTH 0604-001415 1
S15 ITB CAM 0604-001415 1
S16 THERMISTOR-NTC ASSY 1404-001417 1
S17 SENSOR-CTD JC32-00012A 1
S18 AUTOSIZE_SENSOR JC32-00013B 1
S19 CTD-SENSOR JC32-00014A 2
S20 SENSOR HUMIDITY JC32-00015A 1
S21 SENSOR-DEVELOPER JC32-00016A 4

Symbol Sensor Part Code Qty Controller Board

S22 CAM-ACR CHECK 0604-001415 1

3.1. Precautions when replacing parts
3.1.1. Precautions when assembling and disassembling
• Use only approved Samsung spare parts. Ensure that part number, product name, any voltage, current or temperature
rating are correct. Failure to do so could result in damage to the machine, circuit overload, fire or electric shock.
• Do not make any unauthorized changes or additions to the printer, these could cause the printer to malfunction and
create electric shock or fire hazards.
• Take care when dismantling the unit to note where each screw goes. There are 19 different screws. Use of the wrong
screw could lead to system failure, short circuit or electric shock.
• Do not disassemble the LSU unit. Once it is disassembled dust is admitted to the mirror chamber and will seriously
degrade print quality. There are no serviceable parts inside.
• Regularly check the condition of the power cord, plug and socket. Bad contacts could lead to overheating and firfe.
Damaged cables could lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.
3.1.2. Precautions when handling PBA
Static electricity can damage a PBA, always used approved anti-static precautions when handling or storing a PBA.
• Precautions when moving and storing PBA

1) Please keep PBA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.
2) Do not store a PBA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.
• Precautions when replacing PBA

1) Disconnect power connectors first, before disconnecting other cables.
2) Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals or other electronic parts when handling insulated parts.
• Precautions when checking PBA

1) Before touching a PBA, please touch other grounded areas of the chassis to discharge any static electrical charge
on the body.
2) Take care not to touch the PBA with your bare hands or metal objects as you could create a short circuit or get an
electric shock. Take extra care when handling PBAs with moving parts fitted such as sensors, motors or lamps as
they may get hot.
3) Take care when fitting, or removing, screws. Look out for hidden screws. Always ensure that the correct screw is
used and always ensure that when toothed washers are removed they are refitted in their original positions.

3.1.3. Releasing Plastic Latches
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches break easily; release them carefully.
To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

3.2. Replacing the maintenance part
3.2.1. Drum Unit
1. Open the front cover. Remove the waste toner 3. Open the drum unit cover by pulling down the green
container[A]. lever.
2. Open the side cover.
4. Remove the drum unit.

3.2.2. Developer Unit
1. Turn the machine off. 5. Push the toner supply shutter to the direction of arrow.
And then release the toner supply cap.
2. Remove the corresponding drum unit. (Refer to 3.2.1)
3. Remove the developer unit cover[A].
4. Pull down the toner supply shutter.
6. Remove the bracket[B] after removing 1 screw.

7. Remove the developer unit after unplugging the 8. Install the new developer unit.
connector.
9. Turn the machine on while opening the front cover.
10. After machine initialization, close the front cover.

3.2.3. ITB Unit
1. Remove all drum units. (Refer to 3.2.1 Drum Unit.) 5. Take off half of ITB Unit carefully.
6. When you see the lever, push it then take off the ITB
3. Release the both stopper to link the side unit. unit.
4. Pull the holder to the direction of arrow.

3.2.4. Fuser Unit
1. Open the side cover. 2. Remove the fuser unit after removing 2 screws.
3.2.5. Transfer Roller
1. Turn the machine off. 3. Release the transfer roller Assy while pushing the both
side holder to the direction of arrow.
4. Install the new transfer roller Assy.
5. Turn the machine on while opening the side cover.
6. After machine initialization, close the side cover.

3.2.6. Pick-Up_Reverse_Forward roller
1. Open the side cover. 3. Lift small tap, remove the pick up / reverse/ forward
roller.
2. Remove the cassette while pushing the both sides

linkers. NOTE
When replacing these rollers, it is recommended that

you replace all three rollers at the same time.

3.2.7. DADF Pick-up roller Assy
1. Open the DADF-open cover.
2. Open up the HOLDER PICK-UP.
3. Release the DADF pick-up roller Assy by pulling the

shaft to the direction of arrow.

3.2.8. DADF Reverse roller Assy
1. Remove the DADF pick up roller Assy. (Refer to 3.2.7) 3. Release the DADF reverse roller Assy.
2. Release the reverse roller cover[A] by pushing both

hooks.
3.2.9. MP Rollers
1. Remove the long hole part of LEVER-MP LONG from 2. Remove the TRAY-MP MAIN from the attachment
the projection of TRAY-MP MAIN. hole of LEVER-MP FRONT and LEVER-MP REAR.
(Unite the convex part of an axis, and the concave
portion of a hole)

3. Release the metal PIN connected with the main part. 5. Remove 5 screws of BRACKET-R COVER RIGHT.
Separate the RIGHT COVER.
4. Remove screw of BRACKET-DUP MAIN F to

GUIDE-PUSHER DEVE F.
6. Remove 3 screws of BRACKET-F COVER RIGHT.

7. Remove 8 screws. Separate the DUPLEX from the 9. Remove 2 screws. Separate the MP from the DUPLEX.
COVER RIGHT.
10. Remove 4 screws. Separate the MP-LOWER GUIDE

from the MP-UPPER GUIDE.
8. Unplug the connector.

11. Remove the RING-E. Remove the MP-PICK UP from 13. Remove the HOUSING-RETARD MP from the
the HOLDER-MP ROLLER. GUIDE-BASE MP.
14. Remove the RETARD ASSY from the

HOUSING-RETARD MP.
12. Extract the MP PICKUP SHAFT. Remove the

MP-PICK UP RUBBER.

15. Remove the MP-PICK UP RETARD.

3.3. Replacing the main SVC part
3.3.1. Left Cover
1. Remove the COVER-LEFT TOP[A]. 2. Remove the left cover after removing 8 screws.
3.3.2. Rear Cover
1. Remove the rear cover after removing 7 screws.

3.3.3. HVPS
NOTE
CLX-8640/8650 series have 2 HVPS boards.
3.3.3.1. HVPS board1
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to 3.3.1) 2. Unplug all connector on HVPS board1. Remove 4
screws. And remove the HVPS board1.
3.3.3.2. HVPS board2
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2) 3. Unplug all connectors on HVPS board2. Remove 4
screws. And remove the HVPS board2.
2. Unplug all connectors on main board. Remove 4
screws. And remove the main board shield.

3.3.4. Temperature Sensor
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to 3.3.1)
2. Remove the sensor after unplugging the connector.
3.3.5. ITB Waste Auger Drive Unit
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to 3.3.1) 3. Open the front cover. Remove 3 screws. And remove
the ITB Waste Auger Drive Unit.
2. Remove 3 screws. Remove the HVPS board1 with
its holder. Unplug the connector from the ITB Waste
Auger Drive Unit..

3.3.6. LSU
1. Remove the left cover. (Refer to 3.3.1)
2. Unplug all connectors on HVPS board1. Remove 3

screws. And remove the HVPS board1 holder.
3. Remove 2 screws. Take off the LSU slowly.
NOTE
If you yank the LSU, the LSU harness may be damaged.
4. Unplug the LSU harness from the left. Remove the

LSU.

3.3.7. Main board
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2)
2. Unplug all connector on the main board. Remove 6

screws. And remove the main board.
NOTE
When replacing the engine board, you must insert the

MSOK and Memory on new engine board.
3.3.8. SMPS board
2. Unplug all connectors. Remove 8 screws. And the

remove the SMPS board.

3.3.9. Main Drive Unit
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2) 3. Unplug 3 connectors. Remove 11 screws. And remove
the Main Drive Unit.
2. Remove the FRAME-MAIN PBA FINISHER.
3.3.10. SMPS shield
2. Unplug all connectors on SMPS board. Remove 4

screws. And then remove the SMPS shield.

3.3.11. CST Lift Drive unit
1. Remove the SMPS shield. (Refer to 3.3.10) 2. Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And remove
the CST Lift Drive unit.
3.3.12. Fuser Drive Board
1. Remove the SMPS shield. (Refer to 3.3.10)
2. Unplug all connectors on FDB. Remove 4 screws. And

remove the FDB.

3.3.13. Paper Size Sensor
2. Remove the paper size sensor after removing 1 screw.
3.3.14. PH(Paper Handling) Drive Unit
2. Release the harness from the holder.
3. Unplug 2 connectors from the PH drive unit. Remove 5

screws. And remove the PH drive unit.

3.3.15. Fuser Drive Unit
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2) 3. Open the harness clamp. Unplug 2 connectors. Remove
5 screws. And remove the fuser drive unit.
2. Release the harness from the holder. Remove the
Fuser-Duct Unit[A] after removing 3 screws.

3.3.16. Toner Supply Drive Unit
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 3.3.2) 4. Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And remove
the toner supply drive unit.
2. Unplug all connectors. Remove 4 screws. And remove
the main board shield.
3. Remove the SUPPORT-REAR PBA[A] after removing

4 screws.

3.3.17. Side Unit
1. Open the side cover. 3. Remove the side unit after removing the both pins from
the bottom.
2. Release the both dampers by pulling it upward.

3.3.17.1. MP Pick Up Unit
1. Remove the Side Unit. (Refer to 3.3.17) 4. Remove 8 screws.
2. Open the MP tray. Release the arm.
3. Remove the Guide-pusher deve F after removing 1

screw.
5. Remove the Bracket-R/F from the cover.

6. Remove 8 screws. Remove the Duplex MP Assy from 7. Turn the Duplex, MP Assy up. Unplug 2 connectors.
the Cover-R.
8. Remove 2 screws.

9. Remove the MP Pick Up Unit.

3.3.17.2. Duplex Exit Sensor
1. Remove 2 screws. 3. Release the DUPLEX-GUIDE EXIT.
4. Release the duplex exit sensor from the bottom of the

2. Remove 3 screws. DUPLEX-GUIDE EXIT.

3.3.17.3. Duplex Motor
1. Remove the motor cover after removing 1 screw. 2. Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And remove
the duplex motor.
3.3.17.4. Duplex Fan
1. Turn the duplex unit over.
2. Unplug the connector. Remove the duplex fan after

removing 1 screw.

3.3.18. Exit Unit
1. Open the side cover. 3. Unplug the connector. Remove 2 screws. And remove
the Exit Unit.
2. Remove the connector cover after removing 2 screws.

3.3.19. Pick Up Unit
1. Open the side cover. 3. Remove the pick up unit after removing 3 screws.
2. Release the both stoppers.

3.3.20. OPE Unit
1. Remove the OPE cover. 3. Remove the OPE Unit after unplugging the connectors.
2. Remove 5 screws.

3.3.21. DADF Unit
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer 3.3.2) 4. Lift up and release the DADF unit.
2. Remove the DADF connector cover from the rear.
3. Unplug 2 connectors.
3.3.21.1. DADF Hinge
1. Remove 8 screws. 2. Remove the 2 hinge units from the DADF Assy.

3.3.21.2. DADF Cover
1. Remove 3 screws. 3. Open the COVER-OPEN and release the left side of
the Stacker.
2. Release 4 hooks.

4. Release the COVER-SIDE F and COVER-SIDE R.

3.3.21.3. DADF Board
1. Unplug all connectors on DADF board.
2. Remove the DADF board after removing 4 screws.
3.3.21.4. DADF Stacker
1. Unplug the connectors on DADF board. 3. Remove the Stacker.
2. Remove the Legal Harness after removing the Saddle.

3.3.21.5. DADF COVER-OPEN
1. Release the harness from the saddle.
2. Remove the HINGE-R after removing 1 screw.
3. Release the COVER-OPEN while pushing it to the

direction of arrow.

3.3.21.6. DADF GUIDE-PICK UP ASSY
1. Remove the GROUND-ANTISTATIC BRUSH after 2. Remove the GUIDE-PICK UP Assy after removing 4
removing 1 screw. screws.

3.3.21.7. DADF-EXIT UP
1. Remove the DADF-EXIT UP after removing 3 screws.
3.3.21.8. HOLDER-HARNESS
1. Remove the HOLDER-HARNESS after removing 2

screws.

3.3.21.9. COVER-FAN DUCT and COVER-FAN
1. Remove the COVER-FAN DUCT after removing 2 2. Remove the COVER-FAN after removing 3 screws.
screws.
3.3.21.10. DADF-CCDM
1. Remove 3 screws and E-Ring. 2. Release the DADF-CCDM.

3.3.21.11. DADF Drive
1. Release the DADF drive from the COVER-PLATEN 4. Remove the Motor-Bracket after removing 4 screws.
Assy after removing 9 screws.
5. Remove the E-Ring. Remove the gear and pulley. And

release the driving belt.
2. Remove the Pick-Up motor after removing 3 screws.

6. Remove the E-ring and Idle-Gear. Release the driving
belt.
3. Remove the Feed motor after removing 3 screws.

3.3.22. Scanner
3.3.22.1. Scan Glass
1. Remove the DADF Unit. (Refer to 3.3.21) 3. Remove 2 screws. Remove the COVER-GLASS while
pulling the COVER-PLATEN RIGHT slightly.
2. Remove 4 stickers and 4 screws.
4. Push and release the PLATEN GLASS.

3.3.22.2. APS Sensor
1. Remove the Scan Glass. (Refer to 3.3.22.1) 3. Remove the APS sensor after removing 2 screws.
2. Remove 1 screw. Unplug the connector after turning

over the sensor holder.
3.3.22.3. Filter
1. Remove the COVER-FAN. 2. Remove the filter from the COVER-FAN.

3.3.22.4. COVER-GLASS ADF
1. Remove 1 screw. 2. Remove 6 screws. Lift and release the COVER-GLASS

ADF while pulling the COVER-PLATEN and FRONT
to the direction of arrow.
3.3.22.5. Scan Joint Board
1. Remove the DADF Unit. (Refer to 3.3.21) 3. Unplug all harness and cables. Remove 3 screws. And
remove the scan joint board.
2. Remove the COVER-SCAN REAR after removing 8
screws.

3.3.22.6. Fan
1. Remove the COVER-SCAN REAR. (Refer to 3.3.22.5) 3. Remove the Fan after removing 2 screws.
2. Unplug the harness. Remove the sheet.

3.3.22.7. CCDM
1. Remove the Scan Glass. (Refer to 3.3.22.1) 5. Move the CCDM to the middle. Unplug the FFC cable.
Remove the belt by pushing it down.
2. Remove the COVER-GLASS ADF. (Refer to 3.3.22.4)
3. Remove the COVER-PLATEN RIGHT.
6. Release the CCDM after lifting the shaft slightly and

pushing the right.
4. Remove the BRACKET-SHAFT after removing 1

screw.

3.3.22.8. Scanner Assy
1. Remove the DADF unit and OPE unit. (Refer to 5. Remove 2 screws.
3.3.20~21)
2. Remove the rear cover. Unplug the Scanner connectors.
6. Lift up and release the Scanner Assy.
3. Remove the COVER-PLATEN LEFT/ RIGHT,

COVER-SCAN REAR.
4. Remove 3 screws.

3.3.23. SCF (Second Cassette Feeder) with Stand
3.3.23.1. SCF Main Board
1. Remove the SCF rear cover after removing 4 screws.
2. Unplug all connectors. Remove 4 screws. And remove

the SCF main board.

3.3.23.2. SCF Lift Motor Assy
1. Remove the rear cover after removing 4 screws. 2. Unplug the connector. Remove 3 screws. And remove
the Lift Motor Assy.

3.3.23.3. SCF Feed Motor Assy
1. Remove the rear cover after removing 4 screws. 3. Remove the left cover after removing 3 screws.
2. Pull out the cassette. Remove it while pushing both

latches.
4. Remove 2 screws securing Cover-Dummy Front SCF.
5. Remove 3 screws securing Cover-Dummy Front SCF.

6. Remove the Cover-Dummy Front SCF while releasing 8. Remove the Cover-Right TCF after removing 3 screws.
the bottom hooks.
9. Remove the Feed-Motor Assy after removing 3 screws.
7. Remove the Cover-Right Front TCF after removing 3

screws.

3.3.23.4. FOOT
1) Insert 4 FOOTs to the bottom of the SCF.

a) Hold the FOOT.
2) Align the foot to the protrusion of SCF bottom and insert it.

3) Done.
How to remove FOOT

1) Grip the FOOT as shown below.
2) Pull the FOOT out while pushing it with thumbs.

3.3.24. TCF (Triple Cassette Feeder)
3.3.24.1. TCF Main Board
1. Remove the rear cover after removing 4 screws. 2. Unplug all connectors. Remove 4 screws. And remove
the TCF main board.
3.3.24.2. TCF Lift Motor Assy
1. Remove the rear cover after removing 4 screws. 2. There are 3 identical Lift Motor Assy. To remove a Lift
Motor Assy, remove 3 screws and 1 connector.

3.3.24.3. TCF Feed Motor Assy
1. Remove the rear cover after removing 4 screws. 3. Remove the Cover-Right Front TCF after removing 3
screws.
2. Pull out the cassette. Remove it while pushing both

latches.
4. Remove the Cover-Right TCF after removing 3 screws.

5. Remove the Feed-Motor Assy after removing 3 screws.

3.3.24.4. FOOT
1) Insert 4 FOOTs to the bottom of the TCF.

a) Hold the FOOT.
2) Align the foot to the protrusion of TCF bottom and insert it.

3) Done.
How to remove FOOT

1) Grip the FOOT as shown below.
2) Pull the FOOT out while pushing it with thumbs.

3.3.25. Finisher
1. Unplug the finisher connector. 4. To remove the front cover, remove the 2 screws from
the top and bottom.
2. Open the finisher front cover. Remove the finisher from

the machine while pulling the 1c lever up.
5. Remove the front cover after removing 3 screws.
3. Remove the staple cartridge.

6. If there is a defective part on front view, replace it. 8. If there is a defective part on rear view, replace it.
7. Remove the rear cover after removing 3 screws. 9. Remove 4 screws from the both sides.
10. Release the board cover. Unplug the connector.

11. Remove the finisher main board after removing 3 14. Remove 2 screws.
screws.
15. Remove the duplex guide.

12. Remove 3 screws.


17. Remove the paddles. 20. Remove 2 screws.
21. Turn the top cover over.



3.3.26. HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
1. Turn the machine off. 5. Open the HDD cover.
2. Remove the Cover Left Top.
3. Remove 2 screws.
6. Remove 4 screws securing the HDD.
4. Remove the Cover-Stuck.

7. Unplug the cables. 9. Release the HDD from its holder.
8. Remove 4 screws from HDD holder.

4. Troubleshooting
4. Troubleshooting
4.1. Control Panel
ex ey ez
ev w
ev
e{ e~

ev x
ev u
ev y
ev v

e} ev z
e|
ew
1 Display screen Shows the current machine status and prompts during an operation. You can set
menus easily using the display screen.
2 Status Shows the status of your machine.
3 Job Status Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs, completed jobs, current error code or
secured jobs.
4 Counter Shows the amount of paper used.
5 Eco Turn into Eco mode.
6 Numeric keypad Dials numbers and enters alphanumeric characters. You can also enter the number
value for document copies or other options.
7 Reset Resets the current machine’s setup.
8 On Hook Dial When you press this button, you can hear a dial tone. Then enter a fax number. It is
similar to making a call using speaker phone.
9 Clear Deletes characters in the edit area.
10 Redial/Pause Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode, or inserts a
pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode.
11 Log out Allows user to log out.
12 Power Turn the power on or off. When the blue LED is on, the machine is powered on and
you can use it. If you turn the machine off, press this button for more than two
seconds. Press Yes when the confirmation window appears.
13 Interrupt Stops a job in operation for urgent copying.
14 Stop Stops an operation at any time. The pop-up window appears on the screen showing
the current job that the user can stop or resume.
15 Start Starts a job.
CAUTION
When you use the display screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else.

4. Troubleshooting
4.1.1. Introducing the display screen and useful buttons
Display screen
The display screen on the control panel allows user-friendly operation of the machine. Once you press the home icon on
the screen, it shows the display screen. The display screen image in this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models.
NOTE
• Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may not appear on the display, depending on the optional kit or program
installed in your machine.
• To switch to the next display screen, press the arrow or touch & move on the display screen.
• Depending on the authentication setting, the machine’s users have to enter an ID and a password. In this case, the
machine can only be used by an authorized user who has registered an ID and a password on the machine. Contact the
machine’s administrator.
• Copy : Enters the Copy menu.

• Fax : Enters the Fax menu. Fax is activated on the display screen by installing optional fax kit.
• Stored Documents : Enters the Stored Documents menu.
• Shared Folder : Enters the Shared Folder menu.
• Scan to Email : Enters the Scan to Email menu
• Scan to Server : Enters the Scan to Server menu.
• Scan to PC : Enters the Scan to PC menu.
• Quick Copy : Enters the Quick Copy menu.
• ID Copy : Enters the ID Copy menu.
• USB : Enters the USB menu. When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine, USB is
activated on the display screen.
• Scan to USB : Enters the Scan to USB menu. When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your
machine, Scan to USB is activated on the display screen.

4. Troubleshooting
• Machine Setup : You can browse current machine settings or change machine values.
NOTE
Some menus are only configured by an administrator or an authorized user who has registered ID and password on the
machine by administrator. When the machine requests, enter the ID and password.
Press the black bar on top of the display screen. The following screen appear :
• Toner : Shows the amount of toner used.

• Brightness : Adjusts brightness of the display screen.
• Ongoing : You can check information, such as the IP address, phone number, and accounting.
• USB device is connected : When a USB memory device is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine, this is
activated on the display screen. When you want to remove USB memory from the machine, press Safe to Remove USB
button and press under white bar.
Eco button
The eco feature allows you to save print resources and leads you to eco-friendly printing. When you press the Eco button,
the machine turns the eco mode on or off. If the eco mode is on, you can see the eco image on some features. Some
options in the features are not available to use in the eco mode. For detailed information about eco feature, refer to the
Administrator’s Guide.
• Only administrators have permission for Eco Setting in Machine Setup.

• If the machine requests a password for eco mode, you need to enter the password. Contact your administrator.
• The Eco button is activated only for Copy and Quick Copy menus.
Status Description
Off The machine is not in the Eco mode.
Green On The machine is in the Eco mode.
Job Status button

When you press the Job Status button, the screen lists the currently running, queued, and completed jobs.

4. Troubleshooting
• Current Job: Displays the list of jobs in progress and pending.

- Delete : Removes a selected job from the list.
- Delete All : Removes printing jobs or all jobs from the list. When you press Print Job Only, all printing jobs
are deleted which Job Type is Host Print.
- Promote : Promotes a selected job from the list when the many jobs are queued. The selected job cannot be
promoted in front of the progressing job.
NOTE
You cannot use the Promote button depending on the state of the job. If the Promote button is inactivated when you
select a job, the job you selected is considerably progressed.
• Completed Job : Displays the list of completed jobs.

- Machine Status Message : Displays the error message for the current errors in the machine.
- Error Code : Displays the error message's code.
• Secured Job: Displays the list of secured jobs the user has set in the printer driver. You need to enter the User ID and
Password set in the printer driver.
- Detail : Displays detailed information of the selected job. You can also change the number of copies pressing
Change Settings.
- Edit : Changes the Job Name of the selected job.
• Active Notice: Displays any error messages and codes that have occurred.
Meaning of Status
- Receiving : The machine is receiving data from network or fax line.
- Image Processing : The machine is processing the image (decoding, encoding, converting data format).
- Formatting : The machine is generating the image for printing.
- Pending : The job on the queue is waiting for its turn.
- Transferring : The machine is transferring the data to email, server or fax.
- Scanning : The machine is scanning.
- Dialing: In the fax mode, the machine is dialing to receiver’s fax machine.
- Connecting : In the fax mode, the machine is waiting to connect to destination.
- Printing : The machine is printing.
- Storing : The data is storing to a box or a USB.
- Delayed Job : The job is temporarily stopped until the time you set for Delay Send (email, fax, server).
- Held : In the Secured Job tab, the job is temporarily stopped when the secure print job is sent from a computer. You
can release the job pressing Print.
- Held : Proof Print : The job is temporarily stopped when the proof print job is sent from a computer. You can
release the job pressing Release.

4. Troubleshooting
- Held : Proof Copy : In the copy mode, the job is temporarily stopped when the proof copy was selected. You can
release the job pressing Release.
- Held : User Request : The job is temporarily stopped when Job Hold was pressed. You can release the job
pressing Release.
- Held : Delayed Print : The job is temporarily stopped until the time you set for the delay print job which is sent
from a computer.
- Held : Needs Resources : The job is temporarily stopped when the machine has problem such as paper empty,
paper mismatch, etc.
- Interrupted : The job is temporarily stopped when the (Interrupt) button was pressed for an urgent copy job.
- Paused : The job is paused when the (Stop) button was pressed or the machine fault.
- Completed : The job is completed.
- Completed with error : The job is completed with error.
- Deleted : If you select a job in the list and press Delete, the job is deleted.
Interrupt button
When you press (Interrupt), the machine goes into interrupt mode, which means it stops the current printing job for an urgent
copy job. When the urgent copy job completed, the previous printing job continues.
NOTE
When you select the staple feature for a printing job, interrupt mode works after a stapling completed in the printing job.
Status Description
Off The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.
Green On The machine is in interrupt printing mode.

4. Troubleshooting
4.2. Understanding the status LED
The color of the status LED indicates the machine's current status.
Status Description
Off • The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power saver mode. When data is received, or any button is pressed, it switches
to on-line automatically.
Green On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blinking Fax The machine is sending or receiving faxes.
Copy The machine is copying documents.
Scan The machine is scanning documents.
Print • When the status LED slowly blinks, the machine is receiving data from the computer.
• When the status LED blinks rapidly, the machine is printing data.
Red On • The imaging unit is at the end of its lifespan. Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one.
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.
• The door is open. Close the door.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message.
• The waste toner container is not installed in the machine, or full waste toner container.
Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the
display message. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes its original task.
• The toner cartridge, imaging unit, or waste toner container is near the end of its life. Order a
new toner cartridge, imaging unit, or waste toner container. You can temporarily improve print
quality by redistributing the toner.
NOTE
Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs
and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval,
media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer
stops printing.

4. Troubleshooting
4.3. Updating Firmware
This chapter includes instructions for updating the printer firmware. You can update the printer firmware by using one
of the following methods :
• Update the firmware by using the printer control panel

• Update the firmware by using the network.
4.3.1. Updating from the Printer Control Panel
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions could lead to corruption issues and prevent the proper operation of this printer. Follow
all of the instructions carefully.
1) Download the firmware file from the Global Service Partner Network (GSPN) website.
2) Unzip the firmware file to a folder on your PC.
3) Copy the firmware file (*.hds) to a USB flash drive.
NOTE
The firmware files may be up to 500MB in size. USB flash drive size must be a minimum of 2 GB.
4) Press the button on control panel in this order. (Machine Setup>Others > Application Management > Application)
5) Plug the USB flash drive into the USB port. “Install” button will be activated on the Application tab. Press the “Install”
button.
NOTE
[Install] button remains greyed-out until USB memory drive is detected and mounted properly
6) The installation window will list the files on the USB drive. Touch the name of the firmware file to select it.

4. Troubleshooting
7) Press the “OK” button after marking the check box.
8) Once the installation is complete, “OK” button will be activated. Press “OK” button.
9) After completing the update, you can find the updated versions at [Machine Setup] > [Machine Details] > [Software
Versions].

4. Troubleshooting
4.3.2. Updating from the Network
WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions could lead to corruption issues and prevent the proper operation of this MFP. Follow
all of the instructions carefully.
Perform the following procedure to update the MFP firmware from the network.
1) Go to the SyncThruWeb Service (SWS) main home page. Login as Admin in Sync Thru Web Service.
NOTE
Login using the Administrator ID and Password established during initial machine setup.
2) Click on Maintenance > Application Management > Application > Add.

4. Troubleshooting
3) Choose installation file (F/W file) by browsing the file system and click [OK].
4) The uploading step will start.
5) After uploading the f/w file on MFP, validation information will appear. Check the [Overwrite] check-box if you want
to force the firmware update even if the firmware version to be installed is lower or same with the currently installed
firmware in the device. Press [OK] to start the firmware upgrade.

4. Troubleshooting
6) The firmware update will start.
7) Once the installation is complete, the machine power-off and power-on automatically.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4. JAM removal
4.4.1. Clearing original document jams
When an original jams while passing through the duplex CAUTION

automatic document feeder(DADF), a warning message
appears on the display screen. To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed
document slowly and gently.
Original paper jam in front of scanner

1) Remove any remaining pages from the DADF. 4) Close the DADF cover.
2) Open the DADF cover.
3) Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.
Original paper jam inside of scanner

1) Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.

4. Troubleshooting
2) Open the DADF cover. 5) Open the DADF jam cover.
3) Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.
6) Grasp the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the
feed area by carefully pulling it using both hands.
If you do not see paper in this area, go to the next step.
4) Open the DADF.
7) Close the DADF jam cover and the DADF. Load the
removed pages back into the DADF.

4. Troubleshooting
Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner

1) Remove any remaining pages from the DADF. 4) Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DADF.
5) Close the DADF input tray and the DADF cover. Load
the removed pages back into the DADF.
3) Open the DADF input tray.
Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path

1) Remove any remaining pages from the DADF. 2) Open the DADF cover.

4. Troubleshooting
3) Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DADF. 5) Open the DADF jam cover.
Close the duplex jam cover and the DADF cover. Load
the removed pages back into the DADF. If you do not
see paper in this area, go to the next step.
6) Grasp the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the
4) Open the DADF. feed area by carefully pulling it using both hands.
7) Close the DADF jam cover and the DADF. Load the
removed pages back into the DADF.

4. Troubleshooting
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner

1) Remove any remaining pages from the DADF. 4) Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.

the removed originals back into the DADF.

4. Troubleshooting
Original paper jam in duplex exit area of scanner

1) Remove any remaining pages from the DADF. 4) Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.

5) Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DADF.
the removed originals back into the DADF.

4. Troubleshooting
4.4.2. Clearing paper jams
When a paper jam occurs, a warning message appears on NOTE

the display screen.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly
and gently. Follow the instructions in the following sections
to clear the jam.
Paper jam in tray 1

3) Pressing the rail button in the side of the tray, pull the
CAUTION
tray out.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper
from the machine.
1) Pull out tray 1.
4) Remove the jammed paper from the machine.
5) Insert tray 1 back into the machine until it locks into

place.

4. Troubleshooting
6) Open the right door. Remove the jammed paper by 7) Close the right door.
gently pulling it straight out.

4. Troubleshooting
Paper jam in tray 2

1) Pull out tray 2. 2) Remove the jammed paper from the machine.
NOTE
If you do not see paper in this area: Pressing the rail

button in the side of the tray, pull the tray out.
Remove the jammed paper from the machine.

place.

4. Troubleshooting
4) Open the right bottom door.
6) Close the right bottom door.
5) Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight

out.
Paper jam in tray 3

1) Pull out tray 3.
NOTE

4. Troubleshooting

place.
4) Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder.

out.

4. Troubleshooting
Paper jam in tray 4

1) Pull out tray 4. 2) Remove the jammed paper from the machine.
NOTE


place. Printing automatically resumes.

4. Troubleshooting
4) Open the right bottom door.

out.
Paper jam in the multi-purpose tray

1) If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out 2) Open and close the front door to resume printing.
of the machine.

4. Troubleshooting
Paper jam inside the machine (Jam feed 1)

CAUTION
out.
from the machine.
1) Open the right door.
3) Close the right door.

1) Open the right bottom door. 2) Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight
out.

4. Troubleshooting

1) Open the right bottom door of the triple cassette feeder. 2) Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight
out.
3) Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door.

1) Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder. 2) Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight
out.
3) Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door.

4. Troubleshooting
Paper jam inside the machine (Jam Registration)

CAUTION
out.
from the machine.
Paper jam inside of the machine (Jam at Fuser out)

CAUTION
out.
from the machine.

4. Troubleshooting
Paper jam at the top of duplex path (Jam Duplex Return)

CAUTION
out.
from the machine.
Paper jam at the top of duplex path (Jam Duplex 1)

CAUTION
out.
from the machine.

4. Troubleshooting
Paper jam at the inside of duplex path (Jam Duplex 2)

CAUTION
out.
from the machine.
Paper jam bottom of duplex path (Jam Duplex Regi.)

CAUTION
out.
from the machine.

4. Troubleshooting
Paper jam in exit area (Jam Exit Face down)

1) Gently pull the paper out of the output tray. 2) Open and close the front door. Printing automatically
resumes.
Paper jam front of 2 Bin Finisher

1) Open the 2Bin Finisher front door. 2) Press right of 1c lever and then push stacker to left.
3) Remove the jammed paper.
4) Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.
5) Close the 2Bin Finisher front door.

4. Troubleshooting
Paper jam inside at 2 Bin Finisher, Paper jam inside 2 Bin Finisher’s duplex
1) Open the 2Bin Finisher front door. 3) Remove the jammed paper.
2) Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the

stacker lever 1b down as well. 4) Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker
front cover.

4. Troubleshooting
Paper jam at exit of 2 Bin Finisher

1) Gently pull the paper out through the exit area. 2) Open and close the 2Bin Finisher front door. Printing
automatically resumes.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5. Service Mode (Tech Mode)
4.5.1. Entering and Exiting Service Mode
To enter the service mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter
“1934” and press the “OK” button.
To exit the service mode, press the home button or back button.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.2. Service Mode Menu Tree
a) Information Tab
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Page
Machine Serial Number
Network IP Address
General P.4–38
Total Printed Impressions
Machine Installed Date & Time
Customer Replacement Unit Toner
OPC Unit
Developer Unit
Developer
Waste Toner Container
Supply Status P.4–38
Field Replacement Unit Finisher
Transfer
Fuser
Roller
DADF Roller
Software
P.4–39
Version
Information Power On Hours

Service Hours Low Power Hours P.4–39
Power Save(Sleep) Hours
Fault Log P.4–39
Supplies Information
Fax Protocol Dump List
Auto Color Registration Result
Maintenance
Job Duty
Print Reports P.4–40
TRC Control History
OPC ACR Report
Usage Counter Report
Error Information Report
Diagnostics Page Report
RTF Format
Export Reports XML Format P.4–41
PDF Format

4. Troubleshooting
b) Maintenance Counts Tab

Fault Counts P.4–42
Pick-up Jam
Feed Jam
Print Jam
Duplex Jam
Exit Jam
Feed Jam
Jam Count Regi Jam P.4–42
Scan Jam
Scan Jam Exit Jam
Duplex Regi Jam
Duplex Scan Jam
Maintenance
Duplex Exit Jam
Counts
Toner Cartridge
OPC Unit
Developer Unit
Part Developer
Replacement P.4–43
Count Transfer
Fuser
Roller
DADF Roller
Sheets Delivered to Top Tray
Finisher
Sheets Delivered to Finishing Tray P.4–44
Handling Count
Finisher Set Count

4. Troubleshooting
c) Diagnostics Tab
Engine NVM Initialization P.4–45
Engine
Engine NVM Read/Write P.4–45
Diagnostics
Engine Test Routines P.4–46
Fax NVM Read/Write P.4–51
Fax Diagnostics
Fax Test Routines P.4–51
Platen shading P.4–53
Shading Test
Scanner ADF shading P.4–53
Diagnostics Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write P.4–53
Scanner/DADF Test Routines P.4–53
Automatic Adjustment P.4–55
Magnification P.4–55
Print Adjustment
Image Position P.4–55
Print Test Patterns P.4–56
Adjustment Copy Adjustment Image Position P.4–57
Diagnostics
Scan Area Adjustment
Manual Adjustment P.4–59
DADF Adjustment
Manual Adjustment P.4–61
ACS ACS Level Adjustment P.4–62
Off
Auto Color Registration On P.4–63
Execute Now
Image Manual Color Registration P.4–64

Management Normal
Auto Tone Adjustment Activation P.4–65
Full
Normal
Auto Tone Adjustment P.4–65
Full
Print Test
Skew Pattern P.4–65
Patterns

4. Troubleshooting
d) Service Functions
Main Memory
P.4–67
Clear
Device Configuration Data Clear
Temporary & Spool Data Clear
Hard Disk User Saved Data & Log Clear

P.4–67
Maintenance All Saved Data Clear
Hard Disk Check
HDD Encryption
EIUL On/Off
Toner Save Off/5/10/15/20/25/30 % P.4–67
Enable ADB
Enable Telent
Port P.4–68
Enable OSGI
Service
Functions Enable Samba
Debug Log Off / Job Status / Details P.4–68
Capture Log P.4–68
System SYS
P.4–69
Recovery ALL
TR Control T1 Control T1 PWM +/-

P.4–72
Mode T2 Control T2 PWM +/-
User Data Back up

P.4–73
Management Restore
Clear System
Cache
Enhanced
Off/On
Security
Hibernation Off/On

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.3. Information
4.5.3.1. General
• Information > General

This menu displays the machine’s serial number, assigned IP address, total printed impressions, and the machine
installed date.
4.5.3.2. Supply Status
Customer Replacement Unit (CRU)

• Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit
This menu displays the machine’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check the
information of the selected unit.
Field Replacement Unit (FRU)

• Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit
This menu displays the machine’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to check the
information of the selected unit.
In the CRU and FRU list, there are four columns : items, status, current, max life.
• Item : Refer to the table below.

• Status : This shows the current status of the selected item.
- OK : The current count is smaller than the default warning value
- Check : The current count is bigger than default warning value
- Off : The current count exceeds the max life.
• Count : This shows the current count of the selected item.
• Max. life : This shows the max capacity of the selected item.
Users can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.
Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to 0 after replacing the unit.
Unit Item Max. Life Default Threshold

Yellow 20K 10% 1~ 30%
Magenta 20K 10% 1~ 30%
Toner
Cyan 20K 10% 1~ 30%
Black 20K 10% 1~ 30%
Yellow 40K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Magenta 40K 10% 5 ~ 30%
OPC Unit
Cyan 40K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Black 40K 10% 5 ~ 30%

4. Troubleshooting
Unit Item Max. Life Default Threshold

Yellow 300K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Magenta 300K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Developer Unit
Cyan 300K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Black 300K 10% 5 ~ 30%
Waste Toner Container Waste Toner Container 20K Near Full NA
Finisher Stapler
Finisher NA Near Empty NA
Cartridge
ITB 150K (PM Count) 5% 2% ~ 10%
Transfer
T2 Roller 150K (PM Count) 5% 3% ~ 10%
Fuser Fuser 150K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
P/up Roller MP 150K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
P/up Roller Kit-tray1 150K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
Roller P/up Roller Kit-tray2 150K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
DADF Roller Assembly ADF Roller 150K (PM Count) 10% 5% ~ 20%
4.5.3.3. Software Version
• Information > Software Version

This menu displays all the version of the software installed in the system in detail.
4.5.3.4. Service Hours
• Information > Service Hours

This menu displays three items, “Power on Hours”, “Low Power Hours” and “Power Save Hours”.
- Power on Hours : It indicates the hours of system power on since the first booting of the system.
- Low Power Hours : It indicates the hours of system low power on since the first booting of the system.
- Power Save Hours : It indicates the hours of system power save since the first booting of the system.
4.5.3.5. Fault Log
• Information > Fault Log

This menu displays faults occurred while the system was operating.
Pressing clear button will clear all the save fault log of the system.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.3.6. Print Reports
• Information > Print Reports

This menu displays reports which that can be printed from the system. The following reports will be available to print.
- Supplies Information
- Fax Protocol Dump List
- Auto Color Registration Result
- Maintenance
- Job Duty
- TRC Control History
- OPC ACR Report
- Usage Counter Report
- Error Information Report
- Diagnostics Page Report
Auto Color Registration Result

• Information > Print Reports > Auto Color Registration Result
This report lists last 10 Auto Color Registration results.
If there is color registration problem , and execution of Auto Color Registration does not solve the problem, service
engineers can print out this report and check “Succeeded or Failed for ACR” field.
Result Meaning
0 Success
100 Sensor LED calibration failure
200 Pattern storage failure in register
301 Out of normal range in rear pattern width
302 Out of normal range in front pattern width
304 Out of normal range in center pattern width
308 Number of sensed pattern is lager than normal number (check ITB scratch)
316 Number of sensed pattern is smaller than normal number
e.g.) 323 Multiple errors. For example 301, 302, 304, 316 error occur at the same time. In that case, the
sum of last two digit appears as result
480 Corrected value exceeds the limit of correction
TRC Control History

• Information > Print Reports > TRC Control History
NOTE
TRC means “Tone Reproduction Curve”.
This report shows history of execution of TRC control. TRC control preserves color consistency against changes in
supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The purpose of the history report is to check if TRC
control works normally.

4. Troubleshooting
• If TRC control performs normally, “Pass” count must be non-zero value and “Fail” count must be zero.
• If “Fail” count is not zero, there is a cell that contains non-zero value at “Er(Y,M,C,K)” column and/or “Loc(L,C,R)”
column .
• If a value of certain color at “Er” column is non-zero, the image density sensor needs to be checked.
• If “LED” value is lager than 1600, it indicates that shutter that cleans the image density sensor is not working normally,
and it has to be checked as well.
4.5.3.7. Export Reports
• Information > Export Reports

This menu exports report to usb stick. Configuration, Error Information, Supplies Information, Usage Counter Reports
are exported as the form of selected format.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.4. Maintenance Counts
4.5.4.1. Fault Count
• Maintenance Counts > Fault Count

This menu displays the fault Counts of the system. Users can select one fault group and press “OK” to see detailed fault
descriptions. The detailed fault description window displays engine diagnostic code and descriptions of the fault along
with the number of occurrences.
The following list shows the group of the faults defined for the system.
A1 Motor H1 Input (Trays) System S2 Engine System

A2 Fan H2 Output (Bins) System S3 Scan System
A3 Sensor S4 Fax System
C1 Toner Cartridge Unit M1 Input (Trays) System S5 UI System
C3 Imaging Unit M2 Media Path System S6 Network System
C4 Developer Unit M3 Output (Bins) System S7 HDD System
C6 iTB M4 Auto Document Feeder System U1 Fusing Unit
C7 Fusing unit S1 Video System U2 LSU Unit
4.5.4.2. Jam Count
• Maintenance Counts > Jam Count

This menu displays the jam Counts of the system. Users can select one jam group, which indicates the location of jams, and
press “OK” to see a detailed jam location along with the occurrence of the jam.
The following table shows the jam groups defined for the system :
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Jam Bypass
Jam 0 Tray 1
Pick-up Jam Jam 0 Tray 2
Jam 0 Tray 3 (TCF)
Jam 0 Tray 4 (TCF)
Jam Feed 1
Jam Feed 2
Print Jam Jam Feed 3 (TCF)
Feed Jam
Jam Feed 4 (TCF)
Jam Regi
Jam Fuser Out
Jam Duplex 1
Jam Duplex 2
Duplex Jam
Jam Duplex Regi
Jam Duplex Return

4. Troubleshooting
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Jam Exit In (Face Down)
Jam Exit Out (Face Down)
Jam Exit In (Face Up)
Exit Jam
Jam Exit Out (Face Up)
Jam Exit In (Inner)
Jam Exit Out (Inner)
Feed In Jam
Feed Jam Feed Out Jam
Feed Idle Jam
Regi In Jam
Regi Jam Regi Out Jam
Regi Idle Jam
Scan In Jam
Scan Jam Scan Out Jam
Scan Idle Jam
Exit In Jam
Scan Jam Exit Jam Exit Out Jam
Exit Idle Jam
Duplex Regi In Jam
Duplex Regi Jam Duplex Regi Out Jam
Duplex Regi Idle Jam
Duplex Scan In Jam
Duplex Scan Jam Duplex Scan Out Jam
Duplex Scan Idle Jam
Duplex Exit In Jam
Duplex Exit Jam Duplex Exit Out Jam
Duplex Exit Idle Jam
4.5.4.3. Part Replacement Count
• Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

This menu displays the replacement Counts for the system parts. Users can select one part group and press “OK” to see the
exact name of the part along with the occurrence of the replacement.
The following table shows groups of the replaceable parts of the system.

4. Troubleshooting
Unit Item Sensing Method

Toner (Yellow) Auto Sensing
Toner (Magenta) Auto Sensing
Toner Cartridge
Toner (Cyan) Auto Sensing
Toner (Black) Auto Sensing
OPC Unit (Yellow) Auto Sensing
OPC Unit (Magenta) Auto Sensing
OPC Unit
OPC Unit (Cyan) Auto Sensing
OPC Unit (Black) Auto Sensing
Developer Unit (Yellow) Auto Sensing
Developer Unit (Magenta) Auto Sensing
Developer Unit
Developer (Cyan) Auto Sensing
Developer (Black) Auto Sensing
Developer (Yellow) Auto Sensing
Developer (Magenta) Auto Sensing
Developer
Developer (Cyan) Auto Sensing
Developer (Black) Auto Sensing
ITB Count Clear
ITB
T2 Roller Count Clear
Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing
P/up Roller MP Count Clear
P/up Roller Kit-tray1 Count Clear
Roller P/up Roller Kit-tray2 Count Clear
DADF Roller Assembly ADF Roller Count Clear
4.5.4.4. Finisher Handling Count
• Maintenance Counts > Finisher Handling Count

This menu displays the sheet counts delivered to finisher tray and finisher set count. Users can select one item and press
“OK” to see a count information.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.5. Diagnostics
4.5.5.1. Engine Diagnostics
Engine NVM Initialization

• Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization
This menu initializes all engine NVM value to the default.
NVM Read/Write
• Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > NVM Read/Write
Purpose To change a configuration value for engine firmware.
Operation When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list of codes with
Procedure descriptions and saved values.
Users can also input a code to the text box to find a configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, pressing “Edit” button will open an interface for user input.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Code NVM Description Meaning Default Max/ Min

109-0010 StandBy Temperature offset Target Temperature during standby mode. 0 -1
Target Temperature during Power save
109-0020 Low Power Temperature offset 0 -1
mode.
109-0030 Thin(60~70gsm) Temperature offset Target Temperature for thin paper. 0 -1
109-0040 Plain(70~90gsm) Temperature offset Target Temperature for plain paper. 0 -1
109-0050 Thick(90~105gsm) Temperature offset Target Temperature for thick paper. 0 -1
109-0060 Heavy(106~175gsm) Temperature offset Target Temperature for heavy paper. 0 -1
Extra Heavy1(176~216gsm) Temperature
109-0070 Target Temperature for extra heavy1 paper. 0 -1
offset
Extra Heavy2(217~253gsm) Temperature
109-0080 Target Temperature for extra heavy2 paper. 0 -1
offset
Recycled paper(70~90gsm) Temperature
109-0090 Target Temperature for Recycled paper. 0 -1
offset
109-0150 Transparency Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 -1
109-0170 Envelopes Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 -1
109-0180 Labels Temperature offset Media type offset for fuser roll temperature. 0 -1
109-0190 Thin(60~70gsm) Pressure Offset Fusing nip pressure ofset for thin paper 0 -1
109-0200 Envelopes Pressure Offset Fusing nip pressure offset for envelopes 0 -1
109-0210 Fuser Bias Offset Fuser bias offset TBD TBD
Distant from hsync to lsync (multi-hsync)
112-0150 Manual Color Regi X-offset Yellow 100 200/0
for yellow

4. Troubleshooting
Code NVM Description Meaning Default Max/ Min

112-0160 Manual Color Regi X-offset Magenta 100 200/0
for Magenta
112-0170 Manual Color Regi X-offset Cyan 100 200/0
for Cyan
112-0180 Manual Color Regi X-offset Black 100 200/0
for Black
Distant from psync to Image area for
112-0190 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Yellow 100 200/0
yellow
Distant from psync to Image area for
112-0200 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Magenta 100 200/0
Magenta
112-0210 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Cyan Distant from psync to Image area for Cyan 100 200/0
112-0220 Manual Color Regi Y-offset Black Distant from psync to Image area for Black 100 200/0
112-0270 Manual Color Regi Left Width Yellow Image Area Left Width for Yellow 610 1610/0
112-0280 Manual Color Regi Right Width Yellow Image Area Right Width for Yellow 610 1610/0
112-0290 Manual Color Regi Left Width Magenta Image Area Left Width for Magenta 610 1610/0
112-0300 Manual Color Regi Right Width Magenta Image Area Right Width for Magenta 610 1610/0
112-0310 Manual Color Regi Left Width Cyan Image Area Left Width for Cyan 610 1610/0
112-0320 Manual Color Regi Right Width Cyan Image Area Right Width for Cyan 610 1610/0
112-0330 Manual Color Regi Left Width Black Image Area Left Width for Black 610 1610/0
112-0340 Manual Color Regi Right Width Black Image Area Right Width for Black 610 1610/0
113-0020 Page Count For Quick TRC Page count for Quick TRC 200 (16bit)/0
113-0030 Page Count For Full TRC Page count for Full TRC 1000 (16bit)/0
113-0040 Environment For TRC Environment offset for Normal TRC Sensing 9/0

4. Troubleshooting
Engine Test Routines

• Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the engine.
Operation Procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines
that display along with their descriptions. Users can also directly input an EDC code to the text box to
find a routine. Users can select a maximum of 3 routines at the same time.
After selecting one or multiple routines, pressing the “OK” button will open the test window that lists
selected routines. Users can start/stop a desired test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Code Displayed Name Meaning

100-0010 Tray1 feed motor (Main feed motor) Tray1 feed motor on/off
100-0030 Tray3 feed motor (Option feed motor) Tray3 feed motor on/off
100-0070 Tray1 elevating motor Tray1 elevate motor on/off
100-0130 Bypass motor Bypass motor(MP motor) full speed running/stop
100-0140 Regi motor Regi motor full speed running/stop
100-0190 Duplex Return motor forward Duplex exit motor forward running/stop
100-0200 Duplex Return motor backward Duplex exit motor backward running/stop
100-0230 T1 engage motor T1 engage motor on/off
100-0240 T2 engage motor T2 engage motor on/off
100-0270 Yellow OPC/DEV motor Yellow OPC/DEV motor is on/off
100-0280 Magenta OPC/DEV motor Margenta OPC/DEV motor is on/off
100-0290 Cyan OPC/DEV motor Cyan OPC/DEV motor is on/off
100-0300 Black OPC/DEV motor Black OPC/DEV motor is on/off
100-0380 Toner supply motor yellow Toner dispense(supply) motor on/off
100-0390 Toner supply motor magenta Toner dispense(supply) motor on/off
100-0400 Toner supply motor cyan Toner dispense(supply) motor on/off
100-0410 Toner supply motor black Toner dispense(supply) motor on/off
100-0420 Waste toner motor Waste toner motor on/off
100-0440 Fuser motor Fuser motor forward on/off
100-0460 Fuser gap motor Fuser press control motor on/off
LSU yellow, magenta motor forward on/off (For
100-0490 LSU motor1 forward
Cosmos)
100-0500 LSU motor2 forward LSU cyan, black motor forward on/off (For Cosmos)
100-0530 LSU shutter motor forward The LSU shutter motor forward on/off
100-5000 T1 engage sensor1 Detect if the T1 engage sensor1 is on or off.
100-5010 T1 engage sensor2 Detect if the T1 engage sensor2 is on or off.
100-5020 T2 engage sensor Detect if the T2 engage sensor1 is on or off.

4. Troubleshooting

100-5040 Yellow OPC/DEV motor ready Detect if yellow OPC/DEV motor runs at normal speed
Detect if magenta OPC/DEV motor runs at normal
100-5050 Magenta OPC/DEV motor ready
speed
100-5060 Cyan OPC/DEV motor ready Detect if cyan OPC/DEV motor runs at normal speed
100-5070 Black OPC/DEV motor ready Detect if black OPC/DEV motor runs at normal speed
100-5160 Fuser motor ready Detect if fuser motor runs at normal speed
100-5170 ITB motor ready Detect if ITB motor runs at normal speed
100-5200 LSU motor1 run ready Detects if LSU motor1 runs at normal speed.
100-5210 LSU motor2 run ready Detects if LSU motor2 runs at normal speed.
100-5220 LSU Shutter Sensor Detect if the LSU Shutter motor is on or off
101-0010 Tray1 pick up clutch Engages drive to pick up a paper from tray1.
101-0070 Bypass pick up clutch Bypass Pickup clutch(MP Tray).
101-0160 Duplex clutch Duplex clutch
101-0210 Yellow Dev clutch Engages drive to color, motor dev
101-0220 Magenta Dev clutch Engages drive to color, motor dev
101-0230 Cyan Dev clutch Engages drive to color, motor dev
101-0240 Black Dev clutch Engages drive to color, motor dev
101-5010 Duplex gate solenoid Duplex gate solenoid on/off
101-5020 Duplex solenoid Duplex solenoid on/off
102-0020 Tray1 paper empty sensor Detect when paper is in tray1.
102-0100 Tray1 feed sensor Detect when a paper is at feed sensor.
102-0210 Tray2 feed sensor Detect when a paper is at tray2 feed sensor. (optional)
102-0460 Bypass paper empty sensor Detects when paper is in bypass tray(MP tray).
102-0580 Regi. sensor Detect when a paper is at Regi. sensor.
102-0590 Exit sensor Detect when a paper is at exit sensor.
102-0600 Duplex jam1 sensor Detect when a paper is at duplex jam1 sensor.
102-0610 Duplex jam2 sensor Detect when a paper is at duplex jam2 sensor.
102-0620 Duplex return sensor Detect when a paper is at duplex return Sensor
102-0630 Fuserout sensor Detect when a paper is at fuserout .
102-0640 OHP sensor Detect whether a paper is OHP
102-0700 Out-Bin2 full sensor Detect when a paper is at duplex ready sensor.
102-0710 Main tray feed Cover Detect when main tray is closed.
102-0720 Option tray feed Cover Detect when option tray is closed.

4. Troubleshooting

102-5000 Tray1 paper size number Detect size enum of paper in tray1
102-5040 Bypass paper size number Detect size enum of paper in bypass tray(MP tray).
107-0150 Detach bias Detach(Saw) bias voltage on at normal drive level
107-0200 Yellow Color eraser Yellow color eraser lamp on/off
107-0210 Margenta Color eraser Margenta color eraser lamp on/off
107-0220 Cyan Color eraser Cyan color eraser lamp on/off
107-0230 Black Color eraser Black color eraser lamp on/off
109-0080 Fuser gap home sensor Detect if the fuser press is located Home position.
109-0130 Fuser bias Fuser bias voltage on at normal drive level
109-5000 Fuser temperature A Detects what the temperature A is on fuser.
109-5010 Fuser temperature B Detects what the temperature B is on fuser.
110-0010 LSU LD1 power LSU LD1 power on/off (yellow)
110-0020 LSU LD2 power LSU LD2 power on/off (magenta)
110-0030 LSU LD3 power LSU LD3 power on/off (cyan)
110-0040 LSU LD4 power LSU LD4 power on/off (black)
111-0020 Waste toner Install sensor Detect if the waste toner is installed or not.
111-5000 Yellow toner sensor TC sensor in developer tank.
111-5010 Magenta toner sensor TC sensor in developer tank.
111-5020 Cyan toner sensor TC sensor in developer tank.
111-5030 Black toner sensor TC sensor in developer tank.
111-6000 Waste toner Led sensor Detect waste toner Led is on/off
113-0000 ID1 sensor Start ID sensor1 sensing on/off (TRC/ACR for Cosmos)
Display ID sensor1 reading value (TRC/ACR for
113-5000 Read ID1 sensor
Cosmos)
Cosmos)
Cosmos)
122-0010 Duplex fan1 run Start/Stop duplex fan1 run
122-0020 Duplex fan2 run Start/Stop duplex fan2 run
122-0070 LSU fan1 run Start/Stop LSU fan run
122-0080 LSU fan2 run Start/Stop LSU sub fan run
122-0100 Fuser out fan run Start/Stop fuser out fan
122-0110 SMPS In fan run Start/Stop SMPS in fan
122-0120 SMPS out fan run Start/Stop SMPS out fan
122-0150 HDD fan run Start/Stop HDD fan

4. Troubleshooting

123-0010 Fuser center temperature Display fuser center temperature
123-0020 Fuser side temperature Display fuser side temperature
123-0030 LSU temperature Display laser scan Unit temperature
123-0040 Inner temperature Display temperature in Machine
123-0050 Inner humidity Display humidity in Machine
123-0060 Outter temperature Display outter temperature
123-0070 Outter humidity Display outter humidity

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.5.2. Fax Diagnostics
Fax NVM Read/Write

• Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write
Purpose To change a configuration value for fax firmware.
Operation Procedure When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list of
configuration values that display along with description.
Users can also input a code to the text box to find a configuration value directly.
After selecting one value, pressing “Edit” button will open an interface for user input.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Code (Line 1) Displayed Name Default

20-200 Pause Dial Time 1
20-210 Dial Pulse M/B ratio 0
20-220 Auto Dial Start Pause Time 1
20-300 Ring On Time 170
20-310 Ring Off Time 560
20-320 Ring Detection Freq 1
20-400 DTMF High-Freq Level 8
20-410 DTMF Low-Freq Level 11
20-420 DTMF Timing 5
20-520 Error Rate 2
20-530 Dial Tone Detect 0
20-540 Loop Current Detect 0
20-550 Busy Signal Detect 0
20-700 Line Monitor Setting 0
20-800 Modem Speed 7
20-810 Fax Transmission Level 12
20-830 Auto Dial Timeout 55
20-999 Fax Line Setting
Fax Test Routines

• Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the fax machine.
Operation Procedure When the main Fax Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines that
display along with description. Users can also input a code to the text box to find a routine directly.
After selecting one routine, pressing “OK” button will open the test window that lists selected routine.
Users can start/stop a desired test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A

4. Troubleshooting
Reference N/A
Code (Line 1) Displayed Name Code (Line 1) Displayed Name

20-012 Single Tone 110 Hz 20-044 V.29 9600 bps
20-020 DMTF # Line 20-048 V.17 14400 bps
20-021 DMTF * Line 20-049 V.34 2400 bps
20-022 DMTF 0 Line 20-050 V.34 4800 bps
20-023 DMTF 1 Line 20-051 V.34 7200 bps
20-024 DMTF 2 Line 20-052 V.34 9600 bps
20-025 DMTF 3 Line 20-053 V.34 12000 bps
20-026 DMTF 4 Line 20-054 V.34 14400 bps
20-027 DMTF 5 Line 20-055 V.34 16800 bps
20-028 DMTF 6 Line 20-056 V.34 19200 bps
20-029 DMTF 7 Line 20-057 V.34 21600 bps
20-030 DMTF 8 Line 20-058 V.34 24000 bps
20-031 DMTF 9 Line 20-059 V.34 26400 bps
20-040 V.21 300 bps 20-060 V.34 28800 bps
20-041 V.27ter 2400 bps 20-061 V.34 31200 bps
20-042 V.27ter 4800 bps 20-062 V.34 33600 bps
20-043 V.29 7200 bps

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.5.3. Scanner Diagnostics
Shading Test
• Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test
Purpose To check quality of scanned images, especially defect in optical devices, including lens, mirror,
lamp, and etc, are suspected.
Operation Procedure Press "Share and Print report“ to see if the current shading value is correct.
Mono, red, green, blue gray shading values will be shown on the printed report.
When the previous shading value is needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write

• Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/DADF NVM Read/Write
Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and DADF memory.
Operation Procedure When the main “NVM Read/Write” window displays, users can navigate through the list of codes
with descriptions and saved values.
Users can also directly input a code to the text box to find a NVM.
After selecting a code, the “Edit” button will be enabled only if the code is writable.
If the selected code is writable and the “Edit” button is enabled, press the button to configure the
desired value for the code.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
Code NVM Description Meaning Access

05-0000 Pick up Count Pick up Roller Life Count Read Only
05-0010 Document Duplex Reverse Point Document Duplex Reverse Point Read/Write
05-0020 Document Exit Turn Reverse Point Document Exit Turn Reverse Point Read/Write
Scanner/DADF Test Routines

• Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/DADF Test Routines
Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and DADF.
Operation Procedure When the main scanner/DADF Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list
of routines that display along with description.
Users can also input a code to the text box to find a routine directly.
After selecting one routine, pressing “OK” button will open the test window that lists selected routine.
Users can start/stop a desired test routine.
Verification N/A
Specification N/A
Reference Table below

4. Troubleshooting
Code Changed Displayed Name Value

05-0000 Document Length .1 Sensor High/Low
05-0020 Document Cover Open Sensor High/Low
05-0040 Document Detect Sensor High/Low
05-0060 Document Simplex Registration Sensor High/Low
05-0070 Document Scan Read Sensor1 High/Low
05-0071 Document Scan Read Sensor2 High/Low
05-0080 Document Exit Sensor High/Low
05-0100 Document Regi Clutch High/Low
05-0110 Document Motor Forward Start/Stop
05-0111 Document Motor Backward Start/Stop
05-0120 Document width1 Sensor High/Low
05-0130 Pickup Motor Forward Start/Stop
05-0131 Pickup Motor Backward Start/Stop
05-0140 Pickup Roller Detect Sensor High/Low
05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Speed Simplex Start/Stop
05-0230 Document Jig Test High Speed Simplex Start/Stop
06-0000 Scanner Original Size Detecting Sensor 1 High/Low
06-0001 Scanner Original Size Detecting Sensor 2 High/Low
06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/Close Sensor 1 High/Low
06-0020 Scanner Platen Motor Forward Start/Stop
06-0030 Scanner Platen Motor Backward Start/Stop

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.5.4. Adjustment
Print Adjustment
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Purpose To correct image position of print-outs automatically.
Operation Procedure 1) Press “Paper Supply” button and select a tray.
2) Press “Paper Size” button and select a paper size of the previously selected tray.
3) Press “Print” button. A test pattern will be printed out.
4) Press “Next” button. The system ask to locate the test pattern.
5) Locate the front side of Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass .
NOTE
ADF cannot be used.
6) Press “OK” button. Automatic scanning will occur .

7) Locate the back side of Scanner A/S Chart at the scanner glass again and press “OK” button
once more.
8) The system will automatically calculate the proper value based on scanning result of the
test pattern.
9) The new values are set to the system.
Verification Print out and check if all the position of scale marks (a,b) in the image are located within the specified
limit.
Specification a,b : 10 mm, ± 1.5 mm
Reference Scanner A/S Chart
■ Scanner A/S Chart

4. Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Magnification

Purpose To correct magnification of print-outs manually.
Operation Procedure 1) Press “Vertical Magnification” or “Horizontal Magnification”
2) Horizontal magnification (c) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press
”+”. Otherwise, press “-”.
3) Vertical magnification (d) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press ”+”.
Otherwise, press “-”.
Examp le Ho rizo ntal Vertical

Cas es Ad jus tment Ad jus tment
= 189 mm +10
= 192 mm -20
= 275.3
. mm +17
= 278.9 mm -19
Verification Print out and measure if the length of vertical (400 mm) and horizontal line (277 mm) in the print-out
are correct.
Specification c : 190 mm, ± 1.5 mm (A3)
d : 277 mm, ± 1.5 mm (A3)
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position

Purpose To correct image position of print-outs manually.
Operation Procedure 1) Select a tray required adjustment.
2) Change the adjustment value with arrow button. “+” value will move to Tail-Edge while
“-” value will move to Lead-Edge.
Simplex
Example Simplex
Leading
Cases Side Edge
Edge
= 8.5 mm + 15
= 11.6 mm -16
Verification Print out and check if all the position of scale marks (a,b) in the image are located within the specified
limit.
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Print Test Pattern
This menus prints the test pattern.

4. Troubleshooting
Copy Adjustment
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position
Purpose To correct image position of copied images manually.
Operation Procedure 1) Select a tray required adjustment.
2) Change the adjustment value with arrow button. “+” value will move to Tail-Edge while
“-” value will move to Lead-Edge.
Simplex Simplex
Example
Leading Side
Cases
Edge Edge
= 11.5 mm -15
= 8.4 mm -16
Verification 1) Copy the Scanner A/S Chart . Scanning must be occur at the scanner glass .
2) Check if all the position of scale marks (a,b) in the image are located within the specified
limit.

4. Troubleshooting
Scan Area Adjustment

• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Purpose To correct image position and magnification of scanned images automatically.
Operation Procedure 1) Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the scan glass . Note that “Lead Edge” arrows need to head
to the left side of scan glass and to be placed face down. Also note that the Scanner A/S
Charts come in two sizes, A4 and Letter . Choose one size to meet your primary size of use.
2) Press “OK” button. Automatic scanning will occur, and the system will automatically
calculate the proper value based on scanning result of the chart .
3) The new value set to the table.
Verification 1) Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. Scanning must be occur from the scan glass.
2) To check the image position, compare the position of scale marks (a,b) of the chart to
the copy.
3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” of the chart to the copy.
Specification a,b : 10, ± 1.5 mm
c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
Reference A4 Scanner A/S Chart
A4 S ca n n e r A/ S Ch a rt

4. Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment
Purpose To correct image position and magnification of scanned images manually. This function is used when
a result of automatic adjustment does not satisfy the expectation.
Operation Procedure 1) Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose.
• Image Position - Leading Edge
• Image Position - Side Edge
• Magnification - Vertical Direction
2) Select one item and press the “Edit” button.
3) Change the adjustment value with arrow button.
4) Image Position (a, b) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “+”.
Otherwise, press “-”.
5) Magnification (c) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “-”. Otherwise,
press “+”.
6) Press the “OK” button to apply the new value to the system.
NOTE
The value of magnification adjustment needs to be calculated based on A3 size, 420mm ((190mm +
10mm*2)*2) if the used Scanner A/S Chart is A4 size.
Verification 1) Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. Scanning must be occur from the scan glass.
2) To check the image position, compare the position of scale marks (a,b) of the chart to the
copy.
3) To check the magnification, compare the length of line “c” of the chart to the copy .
Specification a,b : 10 , ± 1.5 mm
c: 190 , ± 1.5 mm
Image Position Unit : mm, Scale : 0.1, Min/Max : -6/+6
Magnification Unit : %, Scale: 0.1(0.42mm), Min/Max: 99/101

4. Troubleshooting
DADF Adjustment
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > DADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment
Purpose To correct image position and magnification of scanned images via DADF automatically.
Operation Procedure 1) Locate the Scanner A/S Chart at the DADF. Note that “Lead Edge” arrows need to head to
feeding direction and to be placed face up. Also note that the Scanner A/S Charts come in
two size, A4 and Letter . Choose one size to meet your primary size of use.
2) Press “OK” button. Automatic scanning will occur ,and the system will automatically
calculate the proper value based on scanning result of the chart .
3) The new values are set to the table.
Verification 1) Copy the Scanner A/S Chart. Scanning must be occur from the DADF.
copy.
Specification a,b : 10 ± 1.5 mm
c: 190 ± 1.5 mm

4. Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Adjustment > DADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Purpose To correct image position and magnification of scanned images via DADF manually. This function is
used when a result of automatic adjustment does not satisfy the expectation.
Operation Procedure 1) Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose.
• Image Position - Simplex Leading Edge
• Image Position – Simplex Side Edge
• Magnification – Vertical Direction
2) Select one item and press the “Edit” button.
3) Change the adjustment value with arrow button.
4) Image Position (Simplex Leading Edge, a) : If the current value is smaller than the
specification, press “+”. Otherwise, press “-”.
5) Image Position (Simplex Side Edge, b) : If the current value is smaller than the specification,
press “-”. Otherwise, press “+”.
6) Magnification (c) : If the current value is smaller than the specification, press “-”. Otherwise,
press “+”.
7) Press the “OK” button to apply the new value to the system.
NOTE
The value of magnification adjustment needs to be calculated based on A3 size, 420mm ((190mm +
10mm*2)*2) if the used Scanner A/S Chart is A4 size.
Verification 1) Copy the Scanner A/S Chart. Scanning must be occur from the DADF.
copy.
Specification a,b : 10 ± 1.5 mm
c: 190 ± 1.5 mm
Image Position Unit : mm, Scale : 0.1, Min/Max : -6/+6
Magnification Unit : %, Scale : 0.1(0.42mm), Min/Max : 99/101

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.5.5. ACS (Auto Color Sensing)
• Diagnostics > ACS

Purpose To set the color sensing level of auto color mode in copy function.
Operation Procedure Change the level from 1 to 5.
While the level 1 is the most color sensitive, the level 5 is the most monochrome sensitive.
Verification N/A
Specification
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5
Color
0.1 % 0.4 % 1.0 % 1.5 % 2.0 %
Coverage
Reference N/A

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.5.6. Image Management
Auto Color Registration

• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Color Registration
Purpose To correct color registration of the system when it shows color shift between the original and a copy.
Operation Procedure Change execution condition(s) of the Automatic Color Registration.
• Page Condition : The system executes ACR based on the count of printed pages since
the last ACR execution.
• Inner Temperature : The system executes ACR when inner temperature of the device
increases or decreases by the configured value since the last ACR execution.
• LSU Temperature : The system executes ACR when LSU temperature of the device
increases or decreases by the configured value since the last ACR execution.
NOTE
• ACR execution occurs when one of the ACR option meets the condition.
• Pressing “Execute Now” performs an immediate ACR execution.
Verification Compare the original with a copy after an execution of Auto Color Registration.
Specification
Default Min. Value Max. Value
Page
1000 200 5000
Condition
Inner
0 1 100
Temperature
LSU
4 1 100
Temperature
Reference Incorrect Color Registration in the troubleshooting chapter

4. Troubleshooting
Manual Color Registration

• Diagnostics > Image Management > Manual Color Registration
Purpose To correct color registration of the system manually when it shows color shift between the original
and a copy.
Operation Procedure Adjust the offset value for each color.
• X offset of Y in Left
• X offset of M in Left
• X offset of C in Left
• X offset of Y in Right
• X offset of M in Right
• X offset of C in Right
• Y offset of Y in Center
• Y offset of M in Center
• Y offset of C in Center
Verification Compare the original with a copy after an execution of Manual Color Registration.
Specification N/A
Reference Incorrect Color Registration in the troubleshooting chapter

4. Troubleshooting
Auto Color Tone Adjustment Activation

• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Color Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal
Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor. Normal TRC Control is recommended to
be performed after changing a unit, such as toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB, and reboot.
Low Im a ge De ns ity Gra da tion Re production Fa ilure
Operation Procedure 1) Select “On” or “Off” for Normal TRC Control execution.
• If you select “Off”, Normal TRC Control will not execute.
• If you select “On”, Normal TRC Control will execute as the determined conditions.
2) Change execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.
• Page Count: The system executes Normal TRC Control based on the count of printed
pages since the last execution.
• Time Left Alone: The system executes Normal TRC Control when the system returns
from a power save mode and the rest time exceeds the configured value.
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality has recovered.
Reference Refer to image quality troubleshooting section.
• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full
Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced or the life of the OPC drum is changed.
replacing any OPC drum or density of the image is poor. And this function will be performed when
temperature and/or humidity in the room changes suddenly.
Operation Procedure Change execution condition(s) of Normal TRC Control.
• On : Full TRC Control Enable
• Off : Full TRC Control Disenable
Reference Refer to image quality troubleshooting section.

4. Troubleshooting
Auto Color Tone Adjustment

• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Color Tone Adjustment > Normal
Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image is poor. Normal TRC Control is recommended to
be performed after changing a unit, such as toner cartridge, imaging unit, and ITB, and reboot.
Low Im a ge De ns ity Gra da tion Re production Fa ilure
Operation Procedure Select “Execute” button.

Reference Refer to print quality troubleshooting section.
• Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Color Tone Adjustment > Full
Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is replaced or the life of the OPC drum is changed.
replacing any OPC drum or density of the image is poor. And this function will be performed when
temperature and/or humidity in the room changes suddenly.
Operation Procedure Select “Execute” button.
Reference Refer to print quality troubleshooting section.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.5.7. Print Test Patterns
• Diagnostics > Print Test Patterns > Skew Pattern

This menu prints the test patterns.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.6. Service Functions
4.5.6.1. Main Memory Clear
• Service Functions > Main Memory Clear

This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. It can be used to reset the system to the
initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. All the user configured values return to the default values.
To clear the main memory, users need to select the country of the system locates, and rebooting of the system is required.
4.5.6.2. Hard Disk Maintenance
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Device Configuration Data Clear
- This function formats all device configuration data, for example, user profile, address book, and devices settings,
on the hard disk.
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Temporary and Spool Data Clear
- This function formats all temporary and spool data saved on the hard disk.
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > User Saved Data and Log Data Clear
- This function formats all the user data, for example, box data, pending secure jobs, font, form, macro, data related
applications, and job log, on the hard disk.
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > All Saved Data Clear
- This function formats all the data that can be erased with 3 functions above. The function will NOT format the
hard disk entirely.
• Service Functions > Hard Disk Maintenance > Hard Disk Check
- This function checks a bad sector in the hard disk. If a bad sector is found, the system will display an error message
and send an email notification to the system administrator.
4.5.6.3. Toner Save
• Service Functions > Toner Save

This function reduces the use of toner up to 30% and only applies to monochrome printing.
4.5.6.4. Port
• Service Functions > Port

This function enables/disables remote connections to the system via telnet, OSGI command shell, and SMB(samba) protocol.
This function can be used when there is a problem that requires developers to access the system or when there is a need for
developers to upload applications for a test.
Since enabling those ports can creates a risk of damaging data stored in the device, agreement of the administrator of the
customer site is necessary. The user must log in as the administrator to enable/disable the services.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.6.5. Debug Log
• Service Functions > Debug Log

This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options.
- Off : This option disables the logging option.
- Job Status: This option only enables the logging option of user created jobs.
- Details : This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. Note that this option might
create a trade-off of performance in certain system operation. Use this option when the system behaves abnormally,
and engineers need to investigate problems.
4.5.6.6. Capture Log
• Service Functions > Capture Log

This function copies all the saved log in the system to a UBS memory as a zip file. Note that the size of system log could
reach up to 1GB. If the system log size become considerably huge, it will take longer time to copy to the plugged memory.
1) Connect USB memory to device.
2) Enter service mode by pressing 1 + 2 + 3 buttons. Enter 1934 and OK.
3) Go to "Service Functions > Debug Log" and change debug log level to “DETAILS”.
4) Go to "Service Functions > Capture Log" and press Capture Log button.
5) Once it is completed, the message will be displayed. Then restore the debug log level to ”JOB STATUS”.
NOTE
If the system log size become considerably huge, it will take longer time to copy to the plugged memory.
6) Check is the Log file is created in the USB memory.

4. Troubleshooting
4.5.6.7. System Recovery
• Service Functions > System Recovery
NOTE
There are 3 methods for entering System Recovery mode.
• In case of normal booting,

- Enter SVC mode and select System Recovery menu.
• In case of abnormal booting,

- If the HDD is broken, the machine will enter System Recovery at booting.
- When turning the machine on while pushing the power button on OP panel, you can enter System Recovery forcibly.
This function repairs or formats the HDD of the system. To use this function, a HDD image need to be saved in a USB
memory, and that USB memory needs to be plugged in the system before the execution.
NOTE
• Memory stick file system type : FAT16 or FAT32 not NTFS
• Memory stick must contain the following 3 files only.

- unix script files x 2
- HDD image file x1
1) From the system recovery UI, Choose “SYS” to recover only the system partition of the HDD or “ALL” to recover all
the partition of the HDD.
2) When the system recovery UI is appeared after reboot, choose “HDD Repair” to repair any corrupted data in the selected
partition or choose “HDD Format” to format the data in the selected partition.
a) HDD Format
• Hidden Partition : This can format and reinstall the only System Binary in HDD. User data is not deleted.
• USB : This can format the HDD using USB stick. All data except the stored in MSOK will be deleted.
• Network : This can format the HDD using network. All data except the stored in MSOK will be deleted.

4. Troubleshooting
b) HDD Repair : This can restore the internal system by checking the HDD error. This is for HDD recovery itself
and irrelevant to the user data in device.
3) When pushing “Next” button, the login page for authentication will be displayed. The password will be 1934 as the
factory setting password.
4) When pushing “Next” button, the following page will be displayed.
• In case of selecting USB option :
The Next button is pressed after inserting the USB stick.

The system will check for the required packages in the USB stick. If all the packages are present in the USB
stick then the system will be directed to the confirmation page otherwise an Error page will be displayed with
an appropriate error message.
• In case of selecting Network option :

4. Troubleshooting
This page contains two sections :

- Configure device IP address
a) Device IP: IP address for the device
b) Gateway IP: Gateway IP address for the device
c) Subnet Mask: Network Subnet Mask for the device
- Configure samba settings
a) Server IP : IP address of the server.
b) User ID : user ID of the server to login into the server system
c) Password : password of the server system
d) Shared folder : name of the shared folder on the server, where the packages for the system recovery
are present.
The Next button is pressed after providing the above information.
The system will establish the provided IP to the device and try to connect to the server and check for the available
packages on the server.
If Network is establish and all the packages are present in the shared folder of the server then the system will be
directed to the Confirmation page otherwise an Error page will be displayed with an appropriate error message.
5) When pushing “Next” button on option selection page, the confirmation page will be displayed.

4. Troubleshooting
6) When pushing “Next” button, progress page will be displayed.
7) When completing HDD Recovery or HDD Repair successfully, reboot the machine.
8) After rebooting, the machine will start the system initialization.
NOTE
If the system initialization is not executed, enter the svc mode and execute “Full memory clear”.
If not, the machine may not work normally.
9) Execute the firmware update using the one ROM FW file after system initialization. This work is a must for all FW
module level.
4.5.6.8. TR Control Mode
• Service Functions > TR Control Mode

Purpose To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the transfer value to
optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.
Operation Procedure 1) T1 Control Problems
• Choose the process speed (Full, Half, Lower) based on the type of paper to be used.
• Adjust T1 PWM value based on the problem type.
• Gray Spot : Increase T1 PWM value of the issued color
• Non Cyclic White Line : Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color
• OPC Cyclic Ghost : Decrease T1 PWM value of the issued color
Gr a y Sp o t No n Cyc lic Wh it e Lin e OPC Cyc lic Gh o s t
2) T2 Control Problems
• Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.
• Adjust T2 PWM value based on the problem type.
• Blur : Increase T2 PWM value

4. Troubleshooting
• Poor Transfer : Increase T2 PWM value

• Re-transfer : Decrease T2 PWM value
• White Spot : Decrease T2 PWM value
Blu r Po o r Tr a n s fe r Wh it e Sp o t
Verification Print out a test job and make sure the transfer problem has resolved.
Specification N/A
Reference N/A
4.5.6.9. User Data Management
• Service Functions > User Data Management

This function backup or restore user data stored in the hard disk. The purpose of this function is to backup user data before
format of the hard disk and store back to the hard disk after format. Note that hard disk format will be performed when
the data encryption option is enabled by administrators.
NOTE
To use this function users need to prepare a USB hard disk that its size is larger than 100GB.

4. Troubleshooting
4.6. Error Code and Troubleshooting
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status or errors.
NOTE
Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the options or models.
Error Code Error Message Troubleshooting Page

Motor Failure: #A1-1211. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem
A1-1211 P. 4–86
persists
A1-1212 P. 4–86
persists
A1-1213 P. 4–86
persists
A1-1311 P. 4–88
persists
A1-1312 P. 4–88
persists
A1-1313 P. 4–88
persists
A1-1611 P. 4–90
persists
A1-1612 P. 4–90
persists
A1-1613 P. 4–90
persists
A1-2211 P. 4–92
persists
A1-2212 P. 4–92
persists
A1-2213 P. 4–92
persists
A1-2311 P. 4–94
persists
A1-2312 P. 4–94
persists
A1-2313 P. 4–94
persists
A1-2411 P. 4–96
persists
A1-2412 P. 4–96
persists
A1-2413 P. 4–96
persists
A1-2511 P. 4–98
persists
A1-2512 P. 4–98
persists

4. Troubleshooting

A1-2513 P. 4–98
persists
A1-4310 P. 4–100
persists
A1-5211 P. 4–102
persists
A1-5212 P. 4–102
persists
A1-5213 P. 4–102
persists
A1-5311 P. 4–104
persists
A1-5312 P. 4–104
persists
A1-5313 P. 4–104
persists
A1-5411 P. 4–106
persists
A1-5412 P. 4–106
persists
A1-5413 P. 4–106
persists
A1-5511 P. 4–108
persists
A1-5512 P. 4–108
persists
A1-5513 P. 4–108
persists
A3-2110 ID control has failed. Check the CTD sensor(A3-2110) P. 4–110
A3-2113 The CTD sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper(A3-2113) P. 4–110
A3-2210 ID control has failed. Check the CTD sensor(A3-2210) P. 4–110
Sensor Failure: #A3-3111. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem
A3-3111 P. 4–111
persists
A3-3112 P. 4–111
persists
A3-3113 P. 4–111
persists
A3-3114 P. 4–111
persists
A3-3210 P. 4–113
persists
A3-3211 P. 4–113
persists
A3-3212 P. 4–113
persists

4. Troubleshooting

A3-3310 P. 4–114
persists
A3-3311 P. 4–114
persists
A3-3312 P. 4–114
persists
A3-3410 P. 4–114
persists
A3-3411 P. 4–114
persists
A3-3412 P. 4–114
persists
A3-4114 The ACR sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper(A3-4114) P. 4–116
Lamp Failure: #A4-1117. Open the door, then close it. Call for service if
A4-1117 P. 4–117
the problem persists
Lamp Failure: #A4-1118. Open the door, then close it. Call for service if
A4-1118 P. 4–117
the problem persists
C1-2110 Prepare new yellow toner cartridge P. 4–118
C1-2120 Replace with new yellow toner cartridge P. 4–118
C1-2124 Replace with new yellow toner cartridge P. 4–118
C1-2410 Install yellow toner cartridge P. 4–119
C1-2510 Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–120
C1-2513 New yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–120
C1-2711 Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-2711. Call for service P. 4–121
C1-3110 Prepare new magenta toner cartridge P. 4–122
C1-3120 Replace with new magenta toner cartridge P. 4–122
C1-3124 Replace with new magenta toner cartridge P. 4–122
C1-3410 Install magenta toner cartridge P. 4–123
C1-3510 Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–124
C1-3513 New magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–124
C1-4110 Prepare new cyan toner cartridge P. 4–126
C1-4120 Replace with new cyan toner cartridge P. 4–126
C1-4124 Replace with new cyan toner cartridge P. 4–126
C1-4410 Install cyan toner cartridge P. 4–127
C1-4510 Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–128
C1-4513 New cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–128
C1-5110 Prepare new black toner cartridge P. 4–130
C1-5120 Replace with new black toner cartridge P. 4–130

4. Troubleshooting

C1-5124 Replace with new black toner cartridge P. 4–130
C1-5410 Install black toner cartridge P. 4–131
C1-5510 Black toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–132
C1-5513 New Black Toner Cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–132
C3-2110 Prepare new yellow imaging unit P. 4–134
C3-2120 Replace with new yellow imaging unit P. 4–134
C3-2410 Install yellow imaging unit P. 4–135
C3-2414 Yellow Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-2414. Install yellow imaging unit again P. 4–135
C3-2510 Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–135
C3-2711 Imaging unit Failure: #C3-2711. Call for service P. 4–135
C3-3110 Prepare new magenta imaging unit P. 4–136
C3-3120 Replace with new magenta imaging unit P. 4–136
C3-3410 Install magenta imaging unit P. 4–137
C3-3414 Magenta Imaging Unit Failure #C3-3414. Install magenta imaging unit again P. 4–137
C3-3510 Magenta imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–137
C3-4110 Prepare new cyan imaging unit P. 4–138
C3-4120 Replace with new cyan imaging unit P. 4–138
C3-4410 Install cyan imaging unit P. 4–139
C3-4414 Cyan Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-4414. Install imaging unit again P. 4–139
C3-4510 Cyan imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–139
C3-5110 Prepare new black imaging unit P. 4–140
C3-5120 Replace with new black imaging unit P. 4–140
C3-5410 Install black imaging unit P. 4–141
C3-5414 Black Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-5414. Install imaging unit again P. 4–141
C3-5510 Black imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide P. 4–141
C5-1110 Prepare new transfer belt unit P. 4–142
C5-1120 Replace new transfer belt unit P. 4–142
C6-1110 Prepare new fuser unit P. 4–143
C6-1120 Replace with new fuser unit P. 4–143
C6-1310 Fuser unit is not installed. Install it P. 4–143
C7-1110 Waste toner container is almost full. Order new one P. 4–144

4. Troubleshooting

C7-1130 Waste toner container is full. Replace it P. 4–144
C7-1310 Install waste toner container P. 4–144
C8-2110 Prepare new yellow developer unit P. 4–145
C8-2125 Replace with new yellow developer unit. Call for service P. 4–145
C8-2210 Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2210. Turn off then on P. 4–145
C8-2310 Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2310. Install yellow developer unit again P. 4–145
Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2313. Turn off then on. Please call for service
C8-2313 P. 4–145
if the problem persists
C8-2410 Yellow developer unit is not installed. Install it P. 4–146
C8-3110 Prepare new magenta developer unit P. 4–147
C8-3125 Replace with new magenta developer unit. Call for service P. 4–147
C8-3210 Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3210. Turn off then on P. 4–147
C8-3310 Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3310. Install magenta developer unit again P. 4–147
Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3313. Turn off then on. Please call for
C8-3313 P. 4–147
service if the problem persists
C8-3410 Magenta developer unit is not installed. Install it P. 4–148
C8-4110 Prepare new cyan developer unit P. 4–149
C8-4125 Replace with new cyan developer unit. Call for service P. 4–149
C8-4210 Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4210. Turn off then on P. 4–149
C8-4310 Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4310. Install cyan developer unit again P. 4–149
Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4313. Turn off then on. Please call for service
C8-4313 P. 4–149
C8-4410 Cyan developer unit is not installed. Install it P. 4–150
C8-5110 Prepare new black developer unit P. 4–151
C8-5125 Replace with new black developer unit. Call for service P. 4–151
C8-5210 Black Developer Failure: #C8-5210. Turn off then on P. 4–151
C8-5310 Black Developer Failure: #C8-5310. Install black developer unit again P. 4–151
Black Developer Failure: #C8-5313. Turn off then on. Please call for service
C8-5313 P. 4–151
C8-5410 Black developer unit is not installed. Install it P. 4–152
C9-1112 Replace with new Tray1 pickup roller P. 4–153
C9-1162 Replace with new MP pickup roller P. 4–155
C9-2110 Prepare with new Transfer roller P. 4–158
C9-2120 Replace with new Transfer roller P. 4–158
C9-2220 TR Failure: #C9-2220. Install transfer roller again P. 4–159
H1-1211 Paper jam in Tray 2 P. 4–160

4. Troubleshooting

H1-1230 Input System Failure: #H1-1230. Check Tray 2 connection P. 4–165
H1-1236 Tray Failure: #H1-1236. Check Tray connection P. 4–165
H1-1237 Tray Failure: #H1-1237. Check Tray connection P. 4–165
H1-1253 Input System Failure #H1-1253 : Pull Tray 2 out and insert it P. 4–166
H1-1353 Input System Failure: #H1-1353. Pull Tray 3 out and insert it P. 4–171
H1-1453 Input System Failure: #H1-1453. Pull Tray 4 out and insert it P. 4–176
H2-5001 Finisher Failure #H2-5001. Turn off then on, after checking finisher P. 4–179
H2-5032 Paper jam in front of finisher: #H2-5032 P. 4–192
H2-5033 Paper jam inside of finisher: #H2-5033 P. 4–194
H2-5035 Paper jam at exit of finisher: H2-5035 P. 4–194
H2-5037 Paper jam at exit of finisher: H2-5037 P. 4–196
H2-5048 Finisher door is open. Close it P. 4–197

4. Troubleshooting

H2-5A21 Finisher top door is open. Close it (Display animation) P. 4–199
H2-5A31 The paper in finisher stacker is nearly full. Remove printed paper P. 4–200
H2-5A32 The paper in finisher stacker is full. Remove printed paper P. 4–200
H2-5A34 The paper in finisher bin2 is nearly full. Remove printed paper P. 4–200
H2-5A35 The paper in finisher bin2 is full. Remove printed paper P. 4–200
H2-5A50 Finisher Failure #H2-5A50. Check finisher P. 4–198
H2-5A62 Staple cartridge is low. Replace it P. 4–202
H2-5A63 Staple cartridge is empty or not installed. Replace it P. 4–202
H2-5A90 Paper jam at the top of finisher: #H2-5A90 (Display animation) P. 4–203
M1-1113 Paper jam in Tray 1 P. 4–204
M1-1114 Paper jam in Tray 1 P. 4–204
M1-1610 Paper jam in MP Tray P. 4–206
M2-2113 Paper jam at the top of duplex path P. 4–208
M2-2114 Paper jam at the top of duplex path P. 4–210
M2-2215 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path P. 4–212
M2-2216 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path P. 4–213
M2-2313 Paper jam at the bottom of duplex path. P. 4–214
M2-2414 Paper jam at the return of duplex path P. 4–216
M3-1113 Paper jam in exit area P. 4–217
M3-1114 Paper jam in exit area P. 4–218
M3-2130 Too much paper in output bin tray. Remove printed paper P. 4–220
S1-2411 HDD System Failure: #S1-2411. Turn off then on P. 4–221
S1-2433 System Failure: #S1-2433 . Call for service P. 4–222
S1-2434 HDD Error #S1-2434. Check users guide P. 4–223
S1-2443 HDD System Failure #S1-2443 : Call for service P. 4–222

4. Troubleshooting

S1-2511 MSOK System Failure: #S1-2511. Turn off then on P. 4–224
S1-2521 MSOK Failure: #S1-2521. Call for service P. 4–224
S1-2523 PPM data is incorrect. Call for service. P. 4–224
S1-2530 MSOK Failure: #S1-2530. Call for service. P. 4–224
S1-2540 MSOK Failure: #S1-2540. Call for service. P. 4–224
S2-1211 Engine System Failure: #S2-1211. Turn off then on P. 4–225
S2-331C Calibrating... Please Wait P. 4–226
S2-4210 Front door is open. Close it P. 4–227
S2-4410 Right door is open. Close it P. 4–227
S2-5111 Failed to adjust the color registration P. 4–228
S2-5210 Failed to adjust the OPC Feed forward control P. 4–228
S3-3121 Scanner locked or another problem occurred. P. 4–229
S3-3211 Scan System Failure: #S3-3211. Turn off then on P. 4–231
S5-3111 UI System Failure: #S5-3111. Turn off then on P. 4–232
S6-3122 Network cable is disconnected. Check it P. 4–233
S6-3123 This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it P. 4–234
S6-3128 802.1x authentication failed. Please Contact the System Administrator P. 4–235
S7-2110 Fuser Failure: #S7-2110. Turn off then on P. 4–238

4. Troubleshooting

S8-1111 HVPS Failure: #S8-1111. Turn off then on P. 4–239
S8-1112 HVPS Failure: #S8-1112. Turn off then on P. 4–240
U1-2113 Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2113. Turn off then on P. 4–241
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2115. Turn off then on. Call for service if the
U1-2115 P. 4–243
problem persists
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2132. Turn off then on. Call for service if the
U1-2132 P. 4–245
problem persists
U1-2316 Fuser Failure: #U1-2316. Turn off then on P. 4–247
U1-233A Fuser Failure: #U1-233A. Turn off then on P. 4–249
U1-233D Fuser Failure: #U1-233D. Turn off then on P. 4–249
U1-233E Fuser Failure: #U1-234E. Turn off then on P. 4–249
U1-233F Fuser Failure: #U1-234F. Turn off then on P. 4–249
U2-6121 LSU Failure: #U2-6121. Please turn off then on P. 4–251
LSU Failure: #U2-6122. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem
U2-6122 P. 4–251
persists
U2-6123 LSU Failure: #U2-6123. Please turn off then on P. 4–251
U2-7110 LSU Failure: #U2-7110. Turn off then on P. 4–252
U3-3111 Original paper jam inside the scanner P. 4–253
U3-3711 Original paper jam in the exit area of scanner P. 4–262

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.1. Ax-xxxx type error code
► Error Code
A1–1211
A1–1212
A1–1213
► Error message
Motor Failure: #A1-1211. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists.
► Symptom
Fuser motor operation is abnormal.
► Troubleshooting method
• A1–1211 : Fuser motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–1212 : Fuser motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–1213 : Fuser motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
1) Turn the machine off. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around fuser unit.
2) Check if the fuser unit is damaged. If yes, replace the fuser unit.
3) Remove the rear cover after removing 7 screws.
4) Check if the Fuser motor connectors are connected correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select fuser motor test.
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > 109–0030)

4. Troubleshooting
Check the motor operation.

a) If the motor is not operational,
• Check the signal and power with the DVM. (Refer to 5. System Diagram.)
• If the checked result is normal, replace the motor(JC31-00123B).
• If the checked result is abnormal, check the following.

- If 24V power is not generated, replace the SMPS board(JC44–00150B(220V) / JC44–00149B(110V)).
- If the control signal is abnormal, replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

b) If the motor is operational,
• Check the Pin Num 8. If the value is abnormal, replace the main board. If the value is normal, replace
the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–1311
A1–1312
A1–1313
► Error message
► Symptom
Pick-up motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–1311 : Pick-up motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–1312 : Pick-up motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–1313 : Pick-up motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
1) Turn the machine off. Remove the cassette. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around cassettes.
2) Check if the fuser unit is damaged. If yes, replace the fuser unit.
4) Check if the Pick-up motor connectors are connected correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select pick up motor test.

4. Troubleshooting


the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–1611
A1–1612
A1–1613
► Error message
► Symptom
ITB motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–1611 : ITB motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–1612 : ITB motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–1613 : ITB motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
1) Turn the machine off. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around ITB Unit.
2) Remove and reinstall the ITB unit.

(Refer to 3.2.3 ITB Unit.)
4) Check if the ITB motor connectors are connected correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select ITB motor test while removing the ITB unit.

4. Troubleshooting


the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–2211
A1–2212
A1–2213
► Error message
Motor Failure: #A1-2211. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
Yellow OPC motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–2211 : Yellow OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–2212 : Yellow OPC motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–2213 : Yellow OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
1) Turn the machine off then on. If the error persists, turn the machine off again.
2) Open the front cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around yellow drum drive unit.
3) Turn the machine on. If the error persists, turn the machine off again.
5) Check if the yellow OPC motor connector is connected correctly.
6) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select yellow OPC motor test.

4. Troubleshooting
• If the checked result is normal, replace the motor(JC31-00123C).


the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–2311
A1–2312
A1–2313
► Error message
► Symptom
Magenta OPC motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–2311 : Magenta OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–2312 : Magenta OPC motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–2313 : Magenta OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
2) Open the front cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around magenta drum drive unit.
5) Check if the magenta OPC motor connector is connected correctly.
6) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select magenta OPC motor test.

4. Troubleshooting


the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–2411
A1–2412
A1–2413
► Error message
► Symptom
Cyan OPC motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–2411 : Cyan OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–2412 : Cyan OPC motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–2413 : Cyan OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
2) Open the front cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around cyan drum drive unit.
5) Check if the cyan OPC motor connector is connected correctly.
6) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select cyan OPC motor test.

4. Troubleshooting


the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–2511
A1–2512
A1–2513
► Error message
► Symptom
Black OPC motor operation is abnormal.
• A1–2411 : Black OPC motor is stopped but machine recognizes it as operational.
• A1–2412 : Black OPC motor is not operated for print-job.
• A1–2413 : Black OPC motor is operating but machine recognizes status as "Stopped".
2) Open the front cover. Check if there are any foreign substances or paper around black drum drive unit.
5) Check if the black OPC motor connector is connected correctly.
6) If the connection is OK, turn the machine on. Enter SVC mode. Select black OPC motor test.

4. Troubleshooting


the harness.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–4310
► Error message
► Symptom
ITB engage motor does not operate normally.
1) Enter SVC mode. Select the T1 engage motor test. (Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines >
100–0080)
Push the start button and check the motor operation.
2) If the motor is operational,

a) Open the side cover. Check if the ITB T1 Coupler pressure lever is pushed normally as shown below.
b) If the motor is stopped after 3 times operation, check the following.
• Check if the T1 engage DC motor connector is connected correctly.
• Check if the photo-sensor(0604–001415) in ITB unit is contaminated or assembled correctly.

c) Remove the ITB unit. Check if the ITB T1 Coupler is rotated counterclockwise smoothly.
3) If there is a motor noise or the motor is not operational normally, check the following :

4. Troubleshooting
a) Remove the rear cover after removing 7 screws.
b) Remove the main drive unit.

(Refer to 3.3.9. Main Drive Unit)
i) Rotate the gear by hand.
• If the motor operation is stiff, replace the motor(JC31-00149A)

ii) Measure the resistance value with DVM.
• If the measured value is out of the standard area (7~10 ohm), replace the motor(JC31–00149A)
c) If the motor is normal, measure the motor signal with DVM.
• If the phase output voltage is changed in 0~24V(8~10V), the output value is normal.
• If the phase output voltage is not changed to 0 or 24V, replace the main board(JC92–02429A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–5211
A1–5212
A1–5213
► Error message
► Symptom
Yellow toner is not supplied normally.
• A1–5211 : Yellow toner supply motor is not operational but toner is supplied.
• A1–5212 : Yellow toner supply motor does not operate.
• A1–5213 : Yellow toner supply is stopped during operation.
1) Open the front cover. If the yellow toner pipe is blocked, open it.
2) Turn the machine off then on. If the error persists, check the following steps.
3) Enter SVC mode. Select the yellow toner supply motor test.
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines)
• 111-0000 : Toner Dispense Motor Yellow
4) If the motor is not operational,


4. Troubleshooting
b) Remove the main board shield. Measure the yellow motor power with DVM.
i) If 24V power is generated, replace the yellow toner supply motor(JC31–00159A).

ii) If 24V power is not generated,
• Measure the 24V power on the SMPS board. If the SMPS board(JC44-00150B (220V) / JC44-00149B
(110V)) is defective, replace it.
• If the SMPS board is normal, replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–5311
A1–5312
A1–5313
► Error message
► Symptom
Magenta toner is not supplied normally.
• A1–5311 : Magenta toner supply motor is not operational but toner is supplied.
• A1–5312 : Magenta toner supply motor does not operate.
• A1–5313 : Magenta toner supply is stopped during operation.
1) Open the front cover. If the magenta toner pipe is blocked, open it.
3) Enter SVC mode. Select the magenta toner supply motor test.
• 111-0010 : Toner Dispense Motor Magenta


4. Troubleshooting
b) Remove the main board shield. Measure the magenta motor power with DVM.
i) If 24V power is generated, replace the magenta toner supply motor(JC31–00159A).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–5411
A1–5412
A1–5413
► Error message
► Symptom
Cyan toner is not supplied normally.
• A1–5411 : Cyan toner supply motor is not operational but toner is supplied.
• A1–5412 : Cyan toner supply motor does not operate.
• A1–5413 : Cyan toner supply is stopped during operation.
1) Open the front cover. If the cyan toner pipe is blocked, open it.
3) Enter SVC mode. Select the cyan toner supply motor test.
• 111-0020 : Toner Dispense Motor Cyan


4. Troubleshooting
b) Remove the main board shield. Measure the cyan motor power with DVM.
i) If 24V power is generated, replace the cyan toner supply motor(JC31–00159A).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A1–5511
A1–5512
A1–5513
► Error message
► Symptom
Black toner is not supplied normally.
• A1–5511 : Black toner supply motor is not operational but toner is supplied.
• A1–5512 : Black toner supply motor does not operate.
• A1–5513 : Black toner supply is stopped during operation.
1) Open the front cover. If the cyan toner pipe is blocked, open it.
3) Enter SVC mode. Select the black toner supply motor test.
• 111-0030 : Toner Dispense Motor Black


4. Troubleshooting
b) Remove the main board shield. Measure the black motor power with DVM.
i) If 24V power is generated, replace the black toner supply motor(JC31–00159A).


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A3–2110
A3–2113
A3–2210
► Error message
ID control has failed. Check the CTD sensor(A3-2110)
The CTD sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper(A3-2113)
ID control has failed. Check the CTD sensor(A3-2210)
► Symptom
CTD sensor is defective or CTD sensor calibration is abnormal.
1) Open the side cover.
2) Open the ACR module.
3) Move the shutter to the right manually.
4) Close the side cover.
5) Check if the CTD sensor window is contaminated. If yes, clean the window with soft cloth.
6) If the problem persists, replace the CTD sensor(JC32–00012A and JC32–00014A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A3–3111
A3–3112
A3–3113
A3–3114
► Error message
Sensor Failure: #A3-3111. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists.
► Symptom
The NC sensor in the fuser unit is defective. / The sensor signal is abnormal due to a defective harness.
• A3–3111 : Center NC sensor is in short status.
• A3–3112 : Center NC sensor is in open status.
• A3–3113 : Side NC sensor is in short status.
• A3–3114 : Side NC sensor is in open status.
1) Enter SVC mode. Execute sensor test to check the sensor operation.
• 109-0000 : Fuser Temperature A
• 109-0010 : Fuser Temperature B
2) Remove the fuser unit and disassemble the NC thermistor.
3) Measure the resistance value of the thermistor.

• Side : 1404–001718
• Center : 1404–001719
If the measured value is out of 307KΩ~430KΩ @25℃, replace the thermistor.
4) Install the fuser unit after replacing the thermistor.
5) If the thermistor is normal, replace the harness between the fuser unit and main board. (JC39–01746A)

4. Troubleshooting
6) If the error persists, replace the fuser unit(JC91–01121A(220V) / JC91–01120A(110V)).
7) If the error persists after replacing fuser unit, replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A3–3210
A3–3211
A3–3212
► Error message
Sensor Failure: #A3-3210. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
Inner temperature sensor is defective.
• A3–3210 : Inner temperature sensor value is abnormal.
• A3–3211 : Inner temperature sensor is in short status.
• A3–3212 : Inner temperature sensor is in open status.
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines > 109-0012 Inner Temperature)
3) Check if the inner temperature sensor harness is connected correctly.
4) Remove the harness. Measure the resistance value of the connector at both ends. (C36_16, CN36_17)
• If the values is not in 10KΩ ± 1% (@ 25 ℃), replace the photo sensor (1404-001417).
5) If the sensor is normal, replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A3–3310
A3–3311
A3–3312
A3–3410
A3–3411
A3–3412
► Error message
Actuator Fan Failure #A3-3311: Turn off then on.
► Symptom
Outer temperature/humidity sensor is defective.
• A3–3310 / A3–3311 / A3–3312 : Temperature function is abnormal.
• A3–3410 / A3–3411 / A3–3412 : Humidity function is abnormal.
• 109-0013 : Outer Temperature
• 109-0014 : Humidity Temperature
2) Remove the Cover-Left Top[A]. Remove 8 screws. And remove the left cover.
3) Check the temp sensor harness connection.
4) Disconnect the harness. Measure the resistance value of the connector at both ends.
If the value is not in 47.5KΩ ~ 52.5KΩ (@25 ℃), replace the sensor(JC93-00486A).

4. Troubleshooting
6) Measure the resistance value of two connectors(CN37_12 / CN37_13) at both ends.
7) If the value is not in 47.5KΩ ~ 52.5KΩ (@25 ℃), replace the harness(JC39-01733A).
8) If the harness and sensor are normal, replace the main board(JC92–02516A)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A3–4114
► Error message
The ACR sensor is dirty. Please clean it with soft cloth or paper(A3-4114)
► Symptom
ACR(CTD) sensor is defective or ACR(CTD) sensor calibration is abnormal.
2) Open the ACR module.
3) Move the shutter to the right manually.
5) Check if the CTD sensor window is contaminated. If yes, clean the window with soft cloth.
6) If the problem persists, replace the CTD sensor(JC32–00012A and JC32–00014A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
A4–1117
A4–1118
► Error message
Lamp Failure: #A4-1117. Open the door, then close it. Call for service if the problem persists.
Lamp Failure: #A4-1118. Open the door, then close it. Call for service if the problem persists.
► Symptom
Eraser Lamp is off.
1) Open the front cover and side cover. Remove the waste toner container and imaging units.
2) Enter SVC mode. Execute Lamp test.

• 107–0160 : Erase Lamp1
• 107–0161 : Erase Lamp2
3) Check if the Lamp is on. Remove the rear cover after removing 7 screws.
4) Check the erase Lamp harness connection. (JC39–01733A / JC39–01734A)
5) If the Lamp Assy or harness is defective, replace it. (Harness : JC39–01733A / Erase Lamp Assy : JC98–01979A)
6) If the Lamp Assy and harness are normal, replace the main board(JC92–02516A)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.2. Cx-xxxx type error code
► Error Code
C1–2110
► Error message
Prepare new yellow toner cartridge.
► Symptom
Yellow toner is almost empty.
1) Order new yellow toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C1–2120
C1–2124
► Error message
Replace with new yellow toner cartridge
► Symptom
The yellow toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the yellow toner cartridge.
3) Install the new yellow toner cartridge.
4) Close the front cover.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–2410
► Error message
Install yellow toner cartridge.
► Symptom
The yellow toner cartridge is not installed.
1) Open the front cover. Check if the yellow toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the yellow toner cartridge.
3) If the problem persists, check if the toner cartridge modular jack is contaminated or deformed.
4) Replace the yellow toner cartridge with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–2510
C1–2513
► Error message
Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.
New yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide
► Symptom
Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible.
1) Replace the yellow toner cartridge with a new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–2711
C1–2712
► Error message
Toner Cartridge Failure: #C1-2711. Call for service
► Symptom
The data of CRUM is not detected.
1) Open the front cover. Check if the yellow toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the yellow toner cartridge.
4) Replace the yellow toner cartridge with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–3110
► Error message
Prepare new magenta toner cartridge.
► Symptom
Magenta toner is almost empty.
1) Order new magenta toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C1–3120
C1–3124
► Error message
Replace with new magenta toner cartridge
► Symptom
The magenta toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
2) Remove the magenta toner cartridge.
3) Install the new magenta toner cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–3410
► Error message
Install magenta toner cartridge.
► Symptom
The magenta toner cartridge is not installed.
1) Open the front cover. Check if the magenta toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the magenta toner cartridge.
4) Replace the magenta toner cartridge with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–3510
C1–3513
► Error message
Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.
New magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide
► Symptom
Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible.
1) Replace the magenta toner cartridge with a new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–3711
C1–3712
► Error message
► Symptom
1) Open the front cover. Check if the magenta toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the magenta toner cartridge.
4) Replace the magenta toner cartridge with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–4110
► Error message
Prepare new cyan toner cartridge.
► Symptom
Cyan toner is almost empty.
1) Order new cyan toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C1–4120
C1–4124
► Error message
Replace with new magenta toner cartridge
► Symptom
The cyan toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
2) Remove the cyan toner cartridge.
3) Install the new cyan toner cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–4410
► Error message
Install cyan toner cartridge.
► Symptom
The cyan toner cartridge is not installed.
1) Open the front cover. Check if the cyan toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the cyan toner cartridge.
4) Replace the cyan toner cartridge with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–4510
C1–4513
► Error message
Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.
New cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide
► Symptom
Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible.
1) Replace the cyan toner cartridge with a new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–4711
C1–4712
► Error message
► Symptom
1) Open the front cover. Check if the cyan toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the cyan toner cartridge.
4) Replace the cyan toner cartridge with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–5110
► Error message
Prepare new black toner cartridge.
► Symptom
Black toner is almost empty.
1) Order new black toner cartridge because toner cartridge with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C1–5120
C1–5124
► Error message
Replace with new black toner cartridge
► Symptom
The black toner cartridge is at the end of its life.
2) Remove the black toner cartridge.
3) Install the new black toner cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–5410
► Error message
Install cyan toner cartridge.
► Symptom
The black toner cartridge is not installed.
1) Open the front cover. Check if the black toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the black toner cartridge.
4) Replace the black toner cartridge with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–5510
C1–5513
► Error message
Black toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide.
New black toner cartridge is not compatible. Check users guide
► Symptom
Black toner cartridge is not compatible.
1) Replace the black toner cartridge with a new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C1–5711
C1–5712
► Error message
► Symptom
1) Open the front cover. Check if the black toner cartridge is installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the black toner cartridge.
4) Replace the black toner cartridge with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–2110
► Error message
Prepare new yellow imaging unit
► Symptom
Yellow drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.
1) Order new yellow drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C3–2120
► Error message
Replace with new yellow imaging unit
► Symptom
Yellow drum unit is at the end of its life.
2) Remove the waste toner container.
4) Remove the yellow drum unit.

(3.2.1. Drum Unit)
5) Install the new yellow drum unit.
6) Install the waste toner container.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–2410
C3–2414
C3–2510
► Error message
Install yellow imaging unit.
Yellow Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-2414. Install yellow imaging unit again
Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide
► Symptom
Yellow drum unit is not installed. / The machine can’t read the charger resistance value from the yellow drum unit. /
Yellow drum unit is not compatible.
4) Remove the yellow drum unit.

(3.2.1. Drum Unit)
5) Install the new yellow drum unit.
► Error Code
C3–2711
C3–2712
► Error message
Imaging unit Failure: #C3-2711. Call for service.
► Symptom
1) Open the front cover and side cover.
3) Check if the yellow drum is installed.
4) Remove and reinstall the yellow drum unit.
5) If the problem persists, check that the drum modular jack is contaminated or deformed.
6) Replace the yellow drum unit with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–3110
► Error message
Prepare new magenta imaging unit
► Symptom
Magenta drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.
1) Order new magenta drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C3–3120
► Error message
Replace with new magenta imaging unit
► Symptom
Magenta drum unit is at the end of its life.
4) Remove the magenta drum unit.

(3.2.1. Drum Unit)
5) Install the new magenta drum unit.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–3410
C3–3414
C3–3510
► Error message
Install magenta imaging unit.
Magenta Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-3414. Install magenta imaging unit again
Magenta imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide
► Symptom
Magenta drum unit is not installed. / The machine can’t read the charger resistance value from the magenta drum
unit. / Magenta drum unit is not compatible.
4) Remove the magenta drum unit.

(3.2.1. Drum Unit)
5) Install the new magenta drum unit.
► Error Code
C3–3711
C3–3712
► Error message
► Symptom
3) Check if the magenta drum is installed.
4) Remove and reinstall the magenta drum unit.
6) Replace the magenta drum unit with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–4110
► Error message
Prepare new cyan imaging unit
► Symptom
Cyan drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.
1) Order new cyan drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C3–4120
► Error message
Replace with new cyan imaging unit
► Symptom
Cyan drum unit is at the end of its life.
4) Remove the cyan drum unit.

(3.2.1. Drum Unit)
5) Install the new cyan drum unit.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–4410
C3–4414
C3–4510
► Error message
Install cyan imaging unit.
Cyan Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-4414. Install cyan imaging unit again
Cyan imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide
► Symptom
Cyan drum unit is not installed. / The machine can’t read the charger resistance value from the cyan drum unit. /
Cyan drum unit is not compatible.
4) Remove the cyan drum unit.

(3.2.1. Drum Unit)
5) Install the new cyan drum unit.
► Error Code
C3–4711
C3–4712
► Error message
► Symptom
3) Check if the cyan drum is installed.
4) Remove and reinstall the cyan drum unit.
6) Replace the cyan drum unit with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–5110
► Error message
Prepare new black imaging unit
► Symptom
Black drum unit has almost reached the end of its life.
1) Order new black drum unit because drum unit with level of “Low” will be exhausted soon.
► Error Code
C3–5120
► Error message
Replace with new black imaging unit
► Symptom
Black drum unit is at the end of its life.
4) Remove the black drum unit.

(3.2.1. Drum Unit)
5) Install the new black drum unit.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C3–5410
C3–5414
C3–5510
► Error message
Install black imaging unit.
Black Imaging Unit Failure: #C3-5414. Install black imaging unit again
Black imaging unit is not compatible. Check users guide
► Symptom
Black drum unit is not installed. / The machine can’t read the charger resistance value from the black drum unit. /
Black drum unit is not compatible.
4) Remove the black drum unit.

(3.2.1. Drum Unit)
5) Install the new black drum unit.
► Error Code
C3–5711
C3–5712
► Error message
► Symptom
3) Check if the black drum is installed.
4) Remove and reinstall the black drum unit.
6) Replace the black drum unit with new one.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C5–1110
C5–1120
► Error message
Prepare new transfer belt unit.
Replace new transfer belt unit.
► Symptom
The life of the ITB Unit expires soon or has expired.
1) Turn the machine off.
2) Replace the ITB Unit (JC96-06322A).

(Refer to 3.2.3. ITB Unit)
3) Turn the machine on.
4) Enter SVC mode.

To enter SVC mode, press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter
5) Select “TRANSFER” (INFORMATION > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit > TRANSFER)
6) Select “ITB”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the ITB count.
7) Exit SVC mode by pushing the home button.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C6–1110
C6–1120
► Error message
Prepare new fuser unit.
Replace with new fuser unit.
► Symptom
The life of the fuser unit expires soon or has expired.
2) Remove the Fuser Unit. Install the new Fuser Unit.
► Error Code
C6–1310
► Error message
Fuser unit is not installed. Install it
► Symptom
The Fuser Unit is not installed. / Fuser connector is defective.
1) Turn the machine off then on.
2) If the problem persists, turn the machine off again.
3) Open the side cover. Check if the fuser unit is installed. If not, install the fuser unit.
4) If the fuser unit is installed, remove it.
5) Check if the fuser draw connector (JC39–01747A) and pin are broken or defective.
If they are contaminated, clean them.
6) Install the fuser unit.
7) Close the side cover. Turn the machine on.
8) If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit. (JC91-01120A(110V) / JC91-01121A(220V))
CAUTION
The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fuser unit. When replacing it, you may get burned. Before replacing
it, make sure that fuser unit has cooled.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C7–1110
C7–1130
► Error message
Waste toner container is almost full. Order new one.
Waste toner container is full. Replace it.
► Symptom
The life of the waste toner container expires soon or has expired.
2) Remove the waste toner container. Replace it with new one.
► Error Code
C7–1310
► Error message
Install waste toner container.
► Symptom
The waste toner container is not installed.
2) Remove and reinstall the waste toner container.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–2110
C8–2125
► Error message
Prepare new yellow developer unit
Replace with new yellow developer unit. Call for service
► Symptom
The life of the yellow developer unit expires soon or has expired.
1) If its life is at the end, turn the machine off and replace the developer unit with new one.
(Refer to 3.2.2 Developer Unit.)
► Error Code
C8–2210
C8–2310
C8–2313
► Error message
Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2210. Turn off then on
Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2310. Install yellow developer unit again
Yellow Developer Failure: #C8-2313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The yellow developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.
3) Check if the toner supply pipe is blocked. If it is closed, open it.
4) Install the waste toner container. Close the front cover.
6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the yellow developer unit.
7) If the problem persists, replace the yellow developer unit.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–2410
► Error message
Yellow developer unit is not installed. Install it
► Symptom
The yellow developer unit is not installed.
2) Check if all developer unit is installed. Remove and re-install the developer unit.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–3110
C8–3125
► Error message
Prepare new magenta developer unit
Replace with new magenta developer unit. Call for service
► Symptom
The life of the magenta developer unit expires soon or has expired.
► Error Code
C8–3210
C8–3310
C8–3313
► Error message
Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3210. Turn off then on
Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3310. Install magenta developer unit again
Magenta Developer Failure: #C8-3313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The magenta developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.
6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the magenta developer unit.
7) If the problem persists, replace the magenta developer unit.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–3410
► Error message
Magenta developer unit is not installed. Install it
► Symptom
The magenta developer unit is not installed.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–4110
C8–4125
► Error message
Prepare new cyan developer unit
Replace with new cyan developer unit. Call for service
► Symptom
The life of the cyan developer unit expires soon or has expired.
► Error Code
C8–4210
C8–4310
C8–4313
► Error message
Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4210. Turn off then on
Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4310. Install cyan developer unit again
Cyan Developer Failure: #C8-4313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The cyan developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.
6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the cyan developer unit.
7) If the problem persists, replace the cyan developer unit.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–4410
► Error message
Cyan developer unit is not installed. Install it
► Symptom
The cyan developer unit is not installed.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–5110
C8–5125
► Error message
Prepare new black developer unit
Replace with new black developer unit. Call for service
► Symptom
The life of the black developer unit expires soon or has expired.
► Error Code
C8–5210
C8–5310
C8–5313
► Error message
Black Developer Failure: #C8-5210. Turn off then on
Black Developer Failure: #C8-5310. Install black developer unit again
Black Developer Failure: #C8-5313. Turn off then on. Please call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The black developer unit has a problem with toner supply or sensor calibration.
6) If the problem persists, remove and reinstall the black developer unit.
7) If the problem persists, replace the black developer unit.


4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C8–5410
► Error message
Black developer unit is not installed. Install it
► Symptom
The black developer unit is not installed.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C9–1112
C9–1122
C9–1132
C9–1142
► Error message
Replace with new Tray1 pickup roller.
► Symptom
The life of the pick up/reverse/forward roller for tray1,2,3,4 has expired.
2) Remove the cassette while pushing the both sides linkers.
3) Lift small tap, remove the pick up / reverse/ forward roller.

4. Troubleshooting
4) Enter SVC mode.

5) Select “Roller” (INFORMATION > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit > Roller)
6) Select “P/up roller Kit-tray1~4”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the corresponding
pick up roller.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C9–1162
► Error message
Replace with new MP pickup roller
► Symptom
The life of the MP roller expires soon or has expired.
2) Release the LEVER-MP LONG(JC66–03501A) from the TRAY-MP MAIN(JC63–03673A).
3) Release the LEVER-MP FRONT and LEVER-MP REAR from the TRAY-MP MAIN.
4) Remove the right cover after releasing the locking pins.
5) Remove 1 screw securing GUIDE-PUSHER DEVE F.
6) Remove 8 screws securing RACKET-R/F COVER RIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
7) Remove 8 screws. Disassemble the DUPLEX from the COVER-RIGHT.
8) Unplug the connector.
9) Turn the MP Assy and remove 2 screws.
10)Remove 4 screws from the MP LOWER GUIDE and MP UPPER GUIDE.
11) Remove the E-Ring. Release the MP-PICK UP(JC90–01167A) from the HOLDER-MP ROLLER(JC61–05282A)
12)Remove the SHAFT-LOCK (JC66–00939A). Remove the COUPLER-TORQUE-LIMITER 500 from the MP-PICK
UP.
13)Release and replace the MP-PICKUP RUBBER(JC90–01168A)
14)Assemble the MP unit.
15)Enter SVC mode.

4. Troubleshooting
16)Select “Roller” (INFORMATION > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit > Roller)
17)Select “P/up roller MP”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the MP pick up roller.
18)Exit SVC mode by pushing the home button.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C9–2110
C9–2120
► Error message
Replace with new Transfer roller
► Symptom
The life of the second transfer roller(T2) expires soon or has expired.
2) Replace the second transfer roller with new one.

(Refer to 3.2.5 Transfer Roller.)
4) Enter SVC mode.

5) Select “TRNASFER” (INFORMATION > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit > TRNASFER)
6) Select “T2 Roller”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the T2 roller.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
C9–2220
► Error message
TR Failure: #C9-2220. Install transfer roller again
► Symptom
The transfer roller is not installed properly.
2) Remove and reinstall the second transfer roller.

(Refer to 3.2.5 Transfer Roller.)
4) Enter SVC mode.

5) Select “TRNASFER” (INFORMATION > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit > TRNASFER)
6) Select “T2 Roller”. The “RESET” button will be activated. Click “RESET” to clear the T2 roller.

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.3. H1-xxxx type (Optional Cassette) error code
► Error Code
H1-1211
► Error message
Paper jam in Tray 2.
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred around the pick up roller of the tray2.
1) Remove the tray2. Remove the jammed paper. And install the tray2.
2) If the problem persists, check the followings.
3) Check if the proper paper is loaded in the tray. If not, replace the paper.
4) Check if the pick up/reverse/forward roller are contaminated or worn out. Replace these rollers(JC93–00616A).
5) Check the lifting sensor and lifting motor operations.

4. Troubleshooting
• When the paper or something puts on sensor, check the sensor output. Check if the value is changed to 3.3V
width. If not, replace the sensor(0604–001415)
• If the lifting motor does not operate normally, replace the DRIVE-LIFT TCF(JC93–00722A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1213
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper is not reached to the feed sensor after pick-up.
1) Remove the tray2. Remove the jammed paper. And install the tray.
5) Check the feed sensor operations. If the feed sensor is defective, replace it(0604–001381).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1217
H1-1218
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred in tray2. Paper is not reached to the feed sensor after pick-up from tray2.
• H1–1217 : Paper is not reached to the feed sensor after pick-up from tray2.
• H1–1218 : Paper is not passed the feed sensor within specified time.
5) Check the feed sensor and feed motor operations.

4. Troubleshooting
• When the paper or something puts on feed sensor, check the sensor output. Check if the value is changed to
3.3V width. If not, replace the sensor(0604–001381)
• If the feed motor does not operate normally, replace the DRIVE-PH TCF(JC93–00720A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1230
H1-1236
H1-1237
► Error message
Input System Failure: #H1-1230. Check Tray 2 connection.
Tray Failure: #H1-1236. Check Tray connection
Tray Failure: #H1-1237. Check Tray connection
► Symptom
The communication error between the optional tray and the main machine has occurred.
1) Check if the TCF unit connector is connected to the machine correctly. Reconnect it.
2) Check if the TCF connector on main board is connected correctly.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1253
► Error message
Input System Failure #H1-1253 : Pull Tray 2 out and insert it.
► Symptom
The paper is not fed from tray2.
1) Turn the machine off than on.
2) If the problem persists, turn the machine off.
3) If the lifting motor does not operate normally, replace the DRIVE-LIFT TCF(JC93–00722A).
4) If the feed motor does not operate normally, replace the DRIVE-PH TCF(JC93–00720A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1311
► Error message
► Symptom

4. Troubleshooting

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1317
H1-1318
► Error message
► Symptom

4. Troubleshooting

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1353
► Error message
► Symptom

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1411
► Error message
► Symptom
3) Check if the proper paper is loaded in the tray4. If not, replace the paper.

4. Troubleshooting

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1417
H1-1418
► Error message
► Symptom

4. Troubleshooting

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H1-1453
► Error message
► Symptom

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.4. H2-xxxx type (Finisher) error code
Finisher System Layout
No Location Description Code

1 S1 DUPLEX SENSOR 0604-001415
2 S2 ENTRANCE SENSOR 0604-001415
3 S3 EXIT SENSOR 0604-001415
4 S4 PADDLE HOME SENSOR 0604-001415
5 S5 REAR JOGGER HOME SENSOR 0604-001415
6 S6 FRONT JOGGER HOME SENSOR 0604-001415
7 S7 PAPER DETECTOR SENSOR JC81-03480A
8 S8 EJECTOR HOME SENSOR 0604-001415
9 S9 EXTENTION TRAY HOME SENSOR 0604-001415
10 S10 STACKER TOP SENSOR 0604-001415
11 S11 EXIT JAM SENSOR 0604-001415
12 S12 TOP EMPTY SENSOR 0604-001415
13 S13 TOP EXIT SENSOR 0604-001415
14 S14 SET SENSOR 0604-001415
15 S15 JAN GUIDE DETECTOR SENSOR 0604-001415
16 S16 STACKER FULL SENSOR 0604-001415
17 S17 ENCODER SENSOR 0604-001415
18 M1 ENTRANCE MOTOR JC81-03479A
19 M2 EXIT MOTOR JC81-03479A

4. Troubleshooting
No Location Description Code

20 M3 PADDLE MOTOR JC81-07280A
21 M4 REAR JOGGER MOTOR JC81-03486A
22 M5 FRONT JOGGER MOTOR JC81-03486A
23 M6 SUPPORT FINGER MOTOR JC81-07280A
24 M7 EJECTOR MOTOR JC81-03484AC
25 M8 STACKER MOTOR JC81-03484AC
26 SW1 FRONT DOOR JC81-03469A
27 SW2 LOWER LIMITE JC81-03469A
28 B1 MAIN CONTROL BOARD JC81-07242AB

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5001
H2-5002
H2-5096
► Error message
Finisher Failure #H2-5001. Turn off then on, after checking finisher
► Symptom
Main Paddle operation is abnormal. (Paddle home failure / Paddle move failure)
1) Is the Main Paddle overruns during the operation?
a) Check if the Paddle home sensor actuator(SJ10 3302) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8310) of Paddle home sensor (S4) is disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(SJ10 8310) J8 on the finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
d) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(SJ10 8310), replace it if required.
e) Replace the finisher Paddle home sensor(S4).
f) Replace the Finisher main board(JC81–07242A).
2) Is the Paddle Motor (M3) working?

a) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) of Paddle motor(M3) is disconnected.
b) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) J5 on the finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
c) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(JR10 8320), replace it if required.
d) Replace the Paddle motor(M3).
e) Replace the Finisher main board(JC81–07242A).
3) Check if the gears(SJ10 3308) of Paddle motor(M3) are assembled correctly.
4) Check if the tooth of gears(SJ10 3308) are broken. If it is defective, replace the broken gears(SJ10 3308).

4. Troubleshooting
5) Check if the Paper Path Diverter gears(cam) (JR10 3302) are assembled correctly or operated well.
6) Check if the gears(cam) (JR10 3302) are broken. If it is defective, replace the broken gears(cam).
7) Replace the Paddle Unit(JR10 3130).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5003
H2-5004
H2-5097
► Error message
► Symptom
Front Jogger operation is abnormal.
1) Is the Front Jogger Home sensor (S6) working?
a) Check if the Front Jogger home sensor actuator(SJ10 3318) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8310) of Front Jogger home sensor(S6) is disconnected.
e) Replace the Front Jogger home sensor(S6).
2) Is the Front Jogger motor (M5) working?

a) Check if the connector (SJ10 8310)of Front Jogger motor(M5) is disconnected.
b) Check if the connector (SJ10 8310) J6 on the finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
c) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(SJ10 8310) , replace it if required.
d) Replace the Front Jogger motor(M5).
3) Is there any belt(gear) jumping noise?

a) Check if the Front Jogger driving belt(JC81-03509A) is assembled correctly.
b) Check if the Front Jogger driving belt(JC81-03509A) is broken. Replace the belt if it does.
c) Check if the Front Jogger motor bracket(SJ10 3206) is fasten on tamper base(JR10 3304) by screw.

4. Troubleshooting
d) Check if the tooth of gear(SJ10 3308) is broken. Replace the gear if it does.
e) Check if the Front Jogger shaft(JR10 3304) became pollution. Remove if it does.
4) Replace the Front Jogger Unit(JC81-03511C).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5005
H2-5006
H2-5098
► Error message
► Symptom
Rear Jogger operation is abnormal.
1) Is the Rear Jogger Home sensor (S5) working?
a) Check if the Rear Jogger home sensor actuator(SJ10 3318) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) of Rear Jogger home sensor(S5) is disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) J7 on the finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
d) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(JR10 8320), replace it if required.
e) Replace the Rear Jogger home sensor(S5).
2) Is the Rear Jogger motor (M4) working?

a) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) of Rear Jogger motor is disconnected.
d) Replace the Rear Jogger motor(M4).
3) Is there any belt(gear) jumping noise?

a) Check if the Rear Jogger driving belt(JC81-03509A) is assembled correctly.
b) Check if the Rear Jogger driving belt(JC81-03509A) is broken. Replace the belt if it does.
c) Check if the Rear Jogger motor bracket(SJ10 3206) is fasten on tamper base(JR10 3306) by screw.

4. Troubleshooting
d) Check if the tooth of gear(SJ10 3308) is broken. Replace the gear if it does.
e) Check if the Rear Jogger shaft(SJ10 3404) became pollution. Remove if it does.
4) Replace the Rear Jogger Unit(JC81-03507C).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5007
H2-5008
H2-5099
► Error message
► Symptom
Extension Tray operation is abnormal.
1) Is the Extension Tray Home sensor (S9) working?
a) Check if the Extension Tray home sensor actuator(JC81-03483B) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8380) of Extension Tray home sensor(S9) is disconnected.
d) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(SJ10 8310,SJ10 8380), replace it
if required.
e) Replace the Extension Tray home sensor(S9).
2) Is the Extension Tray motor (M6) working?

a) Check if the connector (SJ10 8310) of Extension Tray motor is disconnected.
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8310) J6 on the finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
c) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(SJ10 8310), replace it if required.
d) Replace the Extension Tray motor(M6).
3) Check if the gears(SJ10 5342) are assembled correctly.
4) Check if the tooth of gears(SJ10 5342) are broken. Replace the broken gears.

4. Troubleshooting
5) Check if the Extension Tray Home sensor bracket(SJ10 5120) is deformed.(make a right angle) Replace the bracket.
6) Replace the Extension Tray Unit(SJ10 5000).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5009
H2-5010
H2-5011
H2-5100
► Error message
► Symptom
Ejector operation is abnormal.
1) Is the ejector home sensor (S8) working?
a) Check if the Ejector home sensor actuator(SJ10 2382) is abnormal.
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8360) of ejector home sensor is disconnected.
d) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(SJ10 8360, JR10 8320), replace it
if required.
e) Replace the ejector home sensor(S8).
2) Is the ejector moves very fast?

a) Check if the Ejector Encoder sensor actuator (SJ10 4362) is abnormal.
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8310) of ejector encoder sensor(S17) is disconnected.
e) Replace the ejector encoder sensor(S17).

4. Troubleshooting
3) Is the ejector motor (M7) working?

a) Check if the connector(SJ10 8310) of ejector motor(SJ10 4143) is disconnected.
d) Replace the ejector motor(M7).
4) Can you hear the sound that the ejector driving belt is jumping during operation?
a) Check if the ejector motor bracket(SJ10 4204) assembly is fasten on compiler bottom frame by screw.
5) Check if the tooth of gears(SJ10 4304) are broken. Replace the broken gears.
6) Replace the ejector unit(JC81-03773C).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5012
H2-5013
H2-5101
► Error message
► Symptom
Stapler head clinching motor is not working properly.
1) Is the Head of Stapler(JC81-03475B) opened?
a) Replace stapler cartridge(JC81-03481A).
b) Check if the connectors(SJ10 8310) of stapler head are disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(SJ10 8310) P7 on the finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
e) Replace the stapler unit(SJ10 3140).
2) Replace the stapler unit(SJ10 3140).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5014
H2-5015
H2-5102
► Error message
► Symptom
Stacker operation is abnormal.
1) Are the Stacker Upper Limit(Top) Sensors (S10) working?
a) Check if the sensor actuator(SJ10 6332A) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8370) of the sensors are disconnected.
d) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(SJ10 8310, SJ10 8370), replace it
if required.
e) Replace the stacker upper limit sensors(S10).
2) Is the Stacker Full Sensor (S16) working?

a) Check if the sensor actuator(JR10 6210) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) of stacker full sensor is disconnected.
e) Replace the stacker encoder sensor(S16).
3) Is the stacker Lower Limit Switch (SW2) working?

a) Check if the sensor actuator(JR10 6310) is abnormality.

4. Troubleshooting
b) Check if the connector(JR10 8360) of stacker Lower switch is disconnected.

e) Replace the stacker bottom limit sensor(SW2).
4) Is the stacker motor (M8) working?

a) Check if the connector(JR10 8360) of stacker motor is disconnected.
d) Replace the stacker motor(M8).
5) Replace the stacker motor gear box(SJ10 6110).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5032
► Error message
Paper jam in front of finisher: #H2-5032
► Symptom
Sheet not leaving finisher paper path section.
Check if there is any paper on the finisher, the IOT paper path. Remove it if there is.
If the error still occurs, check the followings.
1) Check if the Finisher of the interface cable(JC81-03470A) should be connected with the IOT.
a) Power of the IOT Off.
b) IOT and Finisher of the interface cable(JC81-03470A) is connected.
c) Power of the IOT On.
2) Is the LEDs of the Main Control Board (JC81–07242A) working?

<Open the Bottom cover (SJ10 6160) of Finisher >
a) The Finisher of the Door(JC63-03941A, JC81-07249B) should remain closed to all.
b) Red, yellow color LED is ON, and Green LED flickers
c) Replace the Finisher main control board(JC81–07242A).
3) Is the Finisher Entrance Sensor(S2) working?

a) Check if the Entrance sensor actuator(SJ10 2384) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector (SJ10 8350)of Finisher entrance sensor(S2) is disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) J7 on the Finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
d) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(SJ10 8350, JR10 8320), replace it
if required.
e) Replace the Finisher input sensor(S2).

4. Troubleshooting
f) Replace the Finisher main control board(JC81–07242A).
4) Is the Feed Entrance Motor (M1) working?

a) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) of the Feed entrance motor is disconnected.
b) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) J5 on the Finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
d) Replace the Feed entrance motor(M1).
e) Replace the Finisher main control board(JC81–07242A).
5) Check if there is any object on finisher paper path. Remove it if there is.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5033
H2-5035
H2-5036
► Error message
Paper jam inside of finisher: #H2-5033
► Symptom
Sheet jam on finisher paper path section
1) Is the Finisher Entrance Sensor(S2) working?

a) Check if the Entrance sensor actuator(SJ10 2384) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8350) of Finisher entrance sensor(S2) is disconnected.
d) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(JR10 8320, SJ10 8350), replace it
if required.
e) Replace the Finisher entrance sensor(S2).
2) Is the Feed Entrance Motor (M1) working?

a) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) of the Feed entrance motor is disconnected.
b) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) J5 on the Finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
d) Replace the Feed entrance motor(M1).
3) Is the Finisher Exit Sensor (S3,S11) working?

a) Check if the Exit sensor actuator (SJ10 2384) is abnormality.

4. Troubleshooting
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8340) of the Finisher Exit sensor(S3) is disconnected.

if required.
e) Replace the Finisher exit sensor(S3,S11).
4) Is the Feed Exit Motor(M2) working?

a) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) of the Feed exit motor is disconnected.
b) Check if the connector J5 on the finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
d) Replace the Feed exit motor(M2).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5034
H2-5037
► Error message
► Symptom
Sheet jam on finisher exit section
1) Is the Finisher Exit Sensor(S3, S11) working?

a) Check if the Exit sensor actuator (SJ10 2384)is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(SJ10 8340) of the Finisher Exit sensor(S3) is disconnected.
if required.
e) Replace the Finisher exit sensor(S3,S11).
2) Is the Feed Exit Motor(M2) working?

a) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) of the Feed exit motor is disconnected.
b) Check if the connector J5 on the finisher main board(JC81 07242A) is disconnected.
d) Replace the Feed exit motor(M2).
e) Replace the Finisher main control board(JC81 07242A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5048
► Error message
Finisher door is open. Close it
► Symptom
Finisher Door is Opened. Power(24V) supply is cut off, and then stop the operation of Finisher.
Check if the all door of finisher closed.
1) Is the all Doors of Finisher closed?

a) Close the doors(JC63-03941A) opened.
2) Is the Front Door (JC63-03941A) Switch (SW1) working?

a) Check if the Switch(SW1) and the Actuator(JC63-03941A) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(JR10 8360) of Switch is disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(JR10 8360) J2 on the main control board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
e) Replace the Door switch(SW1).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-506x
H2-507x
H2-5A50
► Error message
Finisher Failure #H2-506x. Turn off then on, after checking finisher
Finisher Failure #H2-507x. Turn off then on, after checking finisher
Finisher Failure #H2-5A50. Check finisher
► Symptom
Communication error between the IOT and the Finisher.
1) Check if the Finisher of the interface cable(JC81-03470A) should be connected with the IOT.
a) Power Switch of the IOT Off.
b) IOT and Finisher of the interface cable(JC81-03470A) is connected.
c) Power Switch of the IOT On.
2) Is the LEDs of the Main Control Board (JC81–07242A) working?

< Open the Bottom cover(SJ10 6160) of Finisher >
a) The Finisher of the Doors(JC63-03941A, JC81-07249B) should remain closed to all.
b) Red, yellow color LED is ON, and Green LED flickers.
3) Check the Interface Cable(JC81-03470A) of Main Control Board(JC81–07242A).

a) Check if the connector(JC81–07242A) J1,J3 on the main control board (JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
b) Check for continuity in the wire harness and whether the harness is damaged(JC81-03470A), replace it
if required.
4) Replace the Finisher main control board(JC81–07242A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5A21
► Error message
Finisher Top door is open. Close it
► Symptom
Finisher Top Door is Opened.
Check if the all door of finisher closed.
1) Is the all Doors of Finisher closed?

a) Close the Top Door(JC81-07249B) opened.
2) Is the Top Door Sensor (S16) working?

a) Check if the top door sensor actuator(JC81-07249B) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(JR10 8330) of sensor is disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(JR10 8330) J1,J2 on the main control board (JC81–07242A)is disconnected.
e) Replace the Finisher top Door sensor(S16).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5A31
H2-5A32
H2-5A34
H2-5A35
► Error message
The paper in finisher stacker is nearly full. Remove printed paper
The paper in finisher stacker is full. Remove printed paper
The paper in finisher bin2 is nearly full. Remove printed paper
The paper in finisher bin2 is nearly full. Remove printed paper
► Symptom
Finisher stacker tray made full, or Stacker operation is abnormal.
Check if there is any paper on the Finisher Stacker Tray. Remove it if there is.
1) Is the Finisher Stack Height Sensor (S10) working?

a) Check if the Stack height sensor actuator(SJ10 6332A) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector (SJ10 8370)of Stack height sensor(S10) is disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(SJ10 8310) J8 on the main control board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
if required.
e) Replace the finisher Stack height sensor(S10).
2) Is the Finisher Stack Full Sensor (S17) working?

a) Check if the Stack full sensor actuator(SJ10 6332A) is abnormality.
b) Check if the connector of Stack full sensor is disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(JR10 8320) J18 on the main control board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.

4. Troubleshooting
e) Replace the finisher stack full sensor(S10).
3) Is the Stacker Motor (M8) working?

a) Check if the connector(SJ10 8360) of stacker motor is disconnected.
d) Replace the stack motor(M8).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5A62
H2-5A63
► Error message
Staple cartridge is low. Replace it
Staple cartridge is empty or not installed. Replace it
► Symptom
Can not detected Staple cartridge .
Check if there is Staple Cartridge.
If the error still occurs, check the followings
1) Is the Staple Cartridge mounted?

a) Replace stapler cartridge(JC81-03481A).
b) Check if the connector (SJ10 8310)of Staple is disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(SJ10 8310) J9,J10 on the main control board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
e) Replace staple unit(SJ10 3140).
2) Mount the stapler cartridge(JC81-03481A).
3) Replace the stapler Unit(SJ10 3140)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
H2-5A90
► Error message
Paper jam at the top of finisher: #H2-5A90
► Symptom
Sheet jam on finisher top exit section
1) Is the Top Exit/Top Empty Sensor(S13, S11) working?

a) Check if the Sensor actuator (SJMB2312, SJMB2310) abnormality.
b) Check if the connector(JR10 8340) of the Top exit/Top empty sensor(S13, S12) is disconnected.
c) Check if the connector(JR10 8330J7 on the Finisher main board(JC81–07242A) is disconnected.
if required.
e) Replace the Top exit/Top Empty sensor(S13,S12).
2) Is the Paddle Unit(Paper path diverter) working?

a) Refer to the troubleshooting for “H2–5001” error.

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.5. Mx-xxxx type error code
► Error Code
M1–1113
M1–1114
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred in tray1.
(Refer to 3.2.6 Pick-Up_Reverse_Forward roller)
• If the lifting motor does not operate normally, replace it(JC93–00567A).

4. Troubleshooting
6) If the problem persists, replace the PICKUP CLUTCH(JC47–00039A).
7) If the problem persists, replace the Regi Sensor(0604–001381).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M1–1610
► Error message
Paper jam in MP Tray.
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred in MP tray.
1) Remove the jammed paper from the MP tray.
4) Check if the MP pick up/reverse roller are contaminated or worn out. Replace the defective roller.
• MP PICKUP ROLLER : JC90–01168A
• MP REVERSE ROLLER : JC90–01169A
5) If the regi sensor does not operate normally, replace it(0640–001381).

4. Troubleshooting
6) If the pick up clutch does not operate normally, replace it(JC47–00038A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–2113
► Error message
Paper jam at the top of duplex path
► Symptom
Paper is not reached at the duplex jam sensor and jam has occurred.
• Jam Occurrence Location
1) Check if there is any substance on duplex path. Remove it.
2) Clean the surface of the duplex roller-1. If it is broken or deformed, replace it(JC66–03510A).
3) Enter SVC mode. Execute duplex motor1 test. (Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines >
DUPLEX 1–MOTOR IN/OUT)

4. Troubleshooting
• If the motor operation is abnormal, check the motor connection. If the connection is OK, replace the
motor(JC93–00569A) from the exit unit.
4) Check if the exit sensor actuator operates normally. If actuator or spring is defective, replace it.
5) Check if the duplex jam sensor actuator is assembled correctly. If the photo interruptor is defective, replace
it(0604–001415).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–2114
► Error message
Paper jam at the top of duplex path
► Symptom
Paper is not passed the duplex jam sensor and jam has occurred.

4. Troubleshooting
motor(JC93–00301A) from the duplex unit.
4) Check if the duplex jam sensor actuator is assembled correctly. If the photo interruptor is defective, replace
it(0604–001415).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–2215
► Error message
Paper jam at the inside of duplex path
► Symptom
Paper is not reached the duplex ready sensor and jam has occurred.
4) Check if the duplex ready sensor actuator is assembled correctly. If the spring is defective, replace it(6107–003137).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–2216
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper is not passed the duplex ready sensor and jam has occurred.
4) Check if the duplex ready sensor actuator is assembled correctly. If the spring is defective, replace it(6107–003137).
5) If the regi roller does not rotate, check the regi clutch operation.

4. Troubleshooting
• Enter SVC mode. Execute the regi clutch test. If the regi clutch is defective, replace it(JC47–00039A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–2313
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper is not reached to the regi sensor and jam has occurred.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M2–2414
► Error message
► Symptom
Paper is not passed the regi sensor and jam has occurred.
1) Check if there is any substance on simplex path. Remove it.
2) Check the troubleshooting related to ITB unit.
3) Check the troubleshooting related to fuser unit.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M3–1113
► Error message
Paper jam in exit area.
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred around the fuser unit.
1) Open the side cover. Remove the jammed paper.
2) If the paper in the tray is not proper, replace it.
3) If this jam occurs continually, check the following.

a) Remove the fuser unit. Check if fuser unit has any defective part. Replace the fuser unit(JC91-01120A(110V)
/ JC91-01121A(220V))
b) Check if the exit sensor is assembled correctly. If it is defective, replace it(0604–001415).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M3–1114
► Error message
Paper jam in exit area.
► Symptom
Paper jam has occurred around the fuser unit.
1) Open the side cover. Remove the jammed paper.
2) If the paper in the tray is not proper, replace it.
3) If this jam occurs continually, check the following.

a) Remove the fuser unit. Check if fuser unit has any defective part. Replace the fuser unit(JC91-01120A(110V)
/ JC91-01121A(220V))
b) Check if the exit sensor is assembled correctly. If it is defective, replace it(0604–001415).

4. Troubleshooting
c) Check if the exit roller is assembled correctly. If it is defective, replace it(JC66–03507A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
M3–2130
► Error message
Too much paper in output bin tray. Remove printed paper
► Symptom
There are too much paper in output bin tray.
1) Remove the paper on exit tray.
2) If this error occurs continually, check the following.

a) Check if the bin-full sensor and actuator is assembled correctly.
b) Check if the bin-full sensor is defective.

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.6. Sx-xxxx type error code
► Error Code
S1–2411
► Error message
HDD System Failure #S1-2411: Turn off then on.
► Symptom
Hard Disk is not installed in the machine. / Hard Disk is defective.
1) Check if the HDD is installed correctly.
a) Remove the rear cover.
(Refer to 3.3.2 Rear Cover)
b) Check if the HDD cable is connected correctly.
2) If the problem persists, replace the HDD(JC59–00035A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–2433
S1–2443
S1–2444
S1–2445
S1–2446
S1–2447
S1–2448
S1–2449
► Error message
System Failure: #S1-2433 . Call for service
HDD System Failure #S1-2443 : Call for service
► Symptom
System memory is corrupted. / Unexpected S/W error has occurred.
1) Enter the SVC(tech) mode. Select “System Recovery” in Service Function menu.
2) Execute the hard disk format and firmware re-installation.
3) If the problem persists, replace the HDD(JC59–00035A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–2434
S1–2436
S1–2438
S1–2439
► Error message
HDD Error #S1-2434. Check users guide.
► Symptom
HDD partition or memory is full.
• S1-2434 : Addresses in Address book / User data in User profile
• S1-2436 : System Logs
• S1-2438/2439 : Printing Error / No Paper in Tray
1) Enter SVC mode. Select “Hard Disk Maintenance” in Service Function menu.
2) Execute hard disk format.
3) If the problem persistss, replace the HDD(JC59–00035A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S1–2511
S1–2521
S1–2523
S1–2530
S1–2540
► Error message
MSOK System Failure: #S1-2511. Turn off then on
MSOK Failure: #S1-2521. Call for service
PPM data is incorrect. Call for service & change MSOK
MSOK Failure: #S1-2530. Call for service & change MSOK
MSOK Failure: #S1-2540. Call for service & change MSOK
► Symptom
MSOK has a problem.
1) Turn the machine off and on.
3) Remove the rear cover.

(Refer to 3.3.2. Rear Cover.)
4) Check if the MSOK is inserted correctly. Remove and reinstall it.
5) If the problem persists, replace the main board(JC92–02516).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S2–1211
► Error message
Engine System Failure: #S2-1211. Turn off then on
► Symptom
Communication error between the ASIC on main board and microcontroller IC has occurred.
1) Turn the machine off and on.

(Refer to 3.3.2 Rear Cover.)
4) Replace the main board(JC92-02516A)

(Refer to 3.3.7 Main Board.)
5) Assemble the rear cover. Turn the machine on.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S2–331C
► Error message
Calibrating... Please Wait
► Symptom
Printing Job is stopped because of high temperature inside machine.
1) Open the side cover. Cool the machine. And close the side cover.
2) If the problem persists, enter SVC mode. Execute the temperature sensor test.
(Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > EngineTest Routines > 109-0013 Outer Temperature)
3) Check the temperature sensor connection. If the connection is OK, measure the resistor value of the sensor.
4) If the value is not in 47.5KΩ ~ 52.5KΩ (@ 25 ℃), replace the sensor(JC32–00015A)
5) If the temperature sensor is OK, remove the rear cover.

6) Replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S2–4210
► Error message
Front door is open. Close it.
► Symptom
Front cover is opened.
1) Close the front cover correctly.
2) Check if the cover open sensor connector is connected properly. Reconnect it.
3) If the sensor is defective, replace it.
► Error Code
S2–4410
► Error message
Right door is open. Close it
► Symptom
Side cover is opened.
1) Close the side cover correctly.
2) Check if the cover open sensor connector is connected properly. Reconnect it.
3) If the sensor is defective, replace it.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S2–5111
S2–5112
S2–5120
S2–5131
S2–5132
S2–5133
S2–5135
S2–5136
S2–5161
S2–5164
► Error message
Failed to adjust the color registration
► Symptom
ACR error has occurred.
1) Execute “ACR calibration” manually.
2) Check if the ACR sensor is defective and connector is connected properly.
3) Check the image density and the belt of the ITB unit.
4) If the problem persists, main board.
► Error Code
S2–5210
S2–5220
S2–5231
S2–5232
S2–5233
S2–5234
S2–5240
S2–5250
► Error message
Failed to adjust the OPC Feed forward control
► Symptom
OPC feed forward control failure has occurred.
1) Replace the ITB unit.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S3–3121
► Error message
Scanner locked or another problem occurred.
► Symptom
Scanner module does not move.
1) Open the DADF unit.
2) Check if the scan locking switch is in lock status. Release it. Close the DADF unit.
3) If the problem persists, remove the scan rear cover. Check if all cables on scan joint board are connected correctly.
4) Remove the rear cover. Check if the connector on the main board is connected correctly.
5) Remove the scan glass.

(Refer to 3.3.22.1 Scan Glass.)

4. Troubleshooting
6) Check if the home position sensor cable is connected correctly.
7) If the problem persists, replace the Scan Joint Board(JC92–02518A).
8) If the problem persists, replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S3–3211
► Error message
Scan System Failure #S3-3211: Turn off then on.
► Symptom
DADF board is not connected or communication error occurs between DADF board and Main board.
1) Turn off the machine then on. If the problem persists, check the following.
2) Turn the machine off again.
3) Remove the scan rear cover. Check if the connector on scan joint board is connected correctly.
4) Remove the rear cover. Check if the connector on the main board is connected correctly.
5) Remove the DADF rear cover. Check if the connector on DADF board is connected correctly.
(Refer to 3.3.21.3 DADF Board.)
6) If the connection is OK, replace the DADF board(JC92–02509A).
7) If the problem persists after replacing the DADF board, replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S5–3111
► Error message
UI System Failure #S5-3111:Turn off then on.
► Symptom
Communication error between main board and OPE board has occurred.
2) Check if the OPE cable is connected to the main board correctly.
3) Remove and disassemble the OPE unit.

(Refer to 3.3.20 OPE unit.)
4) Check if the OPE cable is connected to the OPE board correctly.
5) If the connection is OK, replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S6–3122
► Error message
Network cable is disconnected. Check it.
► Symptom
Network cable is disconnected.
1) Check if the network cable is connected to the network port.
2) Check if the green LED of the network port is on.
3) If not, unplug and reconnect the network cable.
4) Check if the network is normal. Connect the network cable to another network device.
5) If the network is OK, replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S6–3123
► Error message
This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it.
► Symptom
Network has some problem. (IP address conflicts with that of other system.
• Change the machine’s IP address.
1) Select “Machine Setup” on the touch screen.
2) Select “Networking Setting”.
3) “Log-In”.
4) Select “TCP/IP”.
5) Select the proper item for your machine.
6) Select “IP Setting”.
7) Select the proper item for your machine.
8) Change the IP address.
1) Change the machine’s 802.1x credentials.

a) Select “Machine Setup” on the touch screen.
b) Select “Security”
c) Select “802.1x”
d) Select the proper authentication mode for your network environment.
e) Input valid credentials.
2) The System Administrator should check if Ethernet port and authentication server were configured correctly.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S6–3128
► Error message
802.1x authentication failed. Please Contact the System Administrator.
► Symptom
Network error. ( A authenticator(e.g. switch) rejected authentication. / There is no response when checking the
ping test.)
1) Change the machine’s 802.1x credentials.
a) Select “Machine Setup” on the touch screen.
b) Select “Security”
c) Select “802.1x”
d) Select the proper authentication mode for your network environment.
e) Input valid credentials.
2) The System Administrator should check if Ethernet port and authentication server were configured correctly.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S7–1110
► Error message
Failure: #S7-1110. Turn off then on
► Symptom
24V power for main board is less than 1.5V.
2) Unplug the power cable.

4) Replace the SMPS board(110V: JC44-00149B, 220V: JC44-00150B)

(Refer to 3.3.8 SMPS board)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S7–1210
► Error message
Failure: #S7-1210. Turn off then on
► Symptom
5V power for main board is less than 0.88V.
2) Unplug the power cable.

4) Replace the SMPS board(110V: JC44-00149B, 220V: JC44-00150B)

(Refer to 3.3.8 SMPS board)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S7–2110
► Error message
Fuser Failure: #S7-2110. Turn off then on
► Symptom
Machine makes relay off because of abnormal heater control.
1) Turn the machine off. Re-install the fuser unit, then turn the machine on.
(Refer to 3.2.4 Fuser unit.)
3) Replace the fuser drive board(110V: JC44-00210A, 220V: JC44-00211A)
4) If the problem persists, replace the main board(JC92–02516A)
5) If the problem persists,

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S8–1111
► Error message
HVPS Failure: #S8-1111. Turn off then on.
► Symptom
24V power for HVPS board1 is less than 1.6V.
2) Remove the left cover.

(Refer to 3.3.1 Left Cover)
3) Replace the HVPS board1(JC44-00220A).

(Refer to 3.3.3.1 HVPS board1)
4) Assemble the left cover. Turn the machine on.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
S8–1112
► Error message
HVPS Failure: #S8-1111. Turn off then on.
► Symptom
24V power for HVPS board2 is less than 1.6V.

3) Replace the HVPS board2(JC44-00221A).

(Refer to 3.3.3.2 HVPS board2)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.7. U1-xxxx type (Fuser) error code
► Error Code
U1–2113
U1–2119
► Error message
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2113. Turn off then on.
► Symptom
The temperature control of fuser unit is abnormal.
CAUTION
The temperature gets hot around the Fuser Unit. To prevent injury, make sure the Fuser Unit area is cool before
performing this procedure.
2) Turn the machine off. Re-install the fuser unit. Then turn the machine on.
3) If the problem persists, remove the fuser unit.
4) Check if the paper is curled on the fuser belt.
5) If yes, replace the fuser unit. If not, check the followings.

a) Remove 8 screws. Remove left/right/top cover.
b) Remove 8 screws. Remove the bracket.

4. Troubleshooting
c) Check if the thermostat(4712–001093) is connected.
d) Check if the center and side lamps(4713-001651 : 110V / 4713-001655 : 220V) are in short status. (Measure
the resistance value between the common-center and common-side.)
e) Check if the thermistor is defective.
6) If the step5 has no problem, replace the fuser unit(JC91-01120A(110V) / JC91-01121A(220V)).
7) If the problem persists, replace these parts in regular sequence.
• Fuser Drive Board : JC44-00210A(110V) / JC44-00211A(220V)
• Main board : JC92-02516A
• SMPS board : JC44-00149B(110V) / JC44-00150B(220V)

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–2115
► Error message
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2115. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The pressure control unit(Cam unit)of the fuser is abnormal.
CAUTION
3) If the problem persists, remove the rear cover. Check if the fuser connector is connected correctly.
4) If the connection is OK, remove the fuser unit.
5) Remove the left/right cover after removing 4 screws.

4. Troubleshooting
6) Check if gears below is broken or contaminated.
7) If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit(JC91-01120A(110V) / JC91-01121A(220V)).
8) If the problem persists, replace the Motor DC(JC31–00159A).
9) If the problem persists, replace the main board(JC92–02516A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–2132
U1–2135
► Error message
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-2132. Turn off then on. Call for service if the problem persists
► Symptom
The temperature control of fuser unit is abnormal.
CAUTION

a) Check if the input voltage is normal.
b) Remove 8 screws. Remove left/right/top cover.
c) Remove 8 screws. Remove the bracket.

4. Troubleshooting
d) Check if the thermostat(4712–001093) is connected.
e) Check if the center and side lamps(4713-001651 : 110V / 4713-001655 : 220V) are in short status. (Measure
f) Check if the thermistor is defective.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–2316
U1–2317
► Error message
► Symptom
The temperature of fuser unit changes abnormally.
CAUTION


4. Troubleshooting

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U1–233x
► Error message
Fuser Unit Failure: #U1-233x. Turn off then on.
► Symptom
The temperature of fuser unit is low. (Low Heat Error)
CAUTION


4. Troubleshooting

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.8. U2-xxxx type (LSU) error code
► Error Code
U2–6121
U2–6122
U2–6123
► Error message
LSU Failure: #U2-6121. Please turn off then on.
► Symptom
LSU motor does not operate or it operates abnormally. Motor ready signal is abnormal.
1) Turn the machine off then on. Check for the LSU motor operation sound during warm-up.
2) Print a demo page to check that the machine operates normally.
3) If the problem persists, check the following :
• If the LSU motor makes a sound,

a) Enter SVC mode to check the LSU motor ready signal.
- Press 1,2,3 number keys simultaneously. When the password dialog box appears, enter “1934” and
press the “OK” button.
b) Select “LSU Motor1 Run Ready”. ( Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines >
110-0000)
c) Press ‘Start’ button. Check that the status has changed to ‘Executing -> Low -> High’.
d) If the status has not changed, the motor ready signal is abnormal. Replace the LSU(JC97-04073A).
(Refer to 3.3.6. LSU)
• If the LSU motor does not makes a sound,

a) Turn the machine off and open the side cover. Unplug and reconnect the LSU cable. (JC39-01743A : Motor
Harness, JC39-01791A : Flat cable) Check that the LSU motor make a sound after turning the machine on.
b) If the LSU Cable(JC39-01743A : Motor Harness, JC39-01791A : Flat cable) is defective, replace it. Check
that the LSU motor make a sound after turning the machine on.
c) If the problem persists, replace the LSU(JC97-04073A).

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U2–7110
► Error message
LSU Failure: #U2-7110. Turn off then on.
► Symptom
The control of LSU temperature is abnormal.
1) Turn the machine off then on. Check if the error message is disappeared.
2) If the problem persists, check the following :

a) Turn the machine off and open the side cover. Unplug the LSU Cable(JC39-01791A : Flat cable) and
Temperature Sensor cable. Reconnect them.
b) Check that the error status after turning the machine on.
c) If the LSU Cable(JC39-01791A : Flat cable) is defective, replace it.
d) If the problem persists, replace the LSU(JC97-04073A).

(Refer to 3.3.6. LSU)

4. Troubleshooting
4.6.9. U3-xxxx type(DADF) error code
► Error Code
U3–3111
U3–3211
U3–3213
U3–3214
► Error message
Original paper jam inside the scanner
► Symptom
Original jam has occurred around the scan in roller and regi roller.
1) Check if the pick up motor operates normally.
a) Check if the paper jam has occurred on DADF tray.
2) Open the ADF cover. Remove the paper on Guide-Pick up Assy.
3) Check if the actuator and pick up assy operate normally.

a) Check the operation of the regi sensor.
b) If the regi sensor operation is OK, check the followings.

4. Troubleshooting
i) Remove 1 screw and push the hook.
ii) Release the Stacker by pulling it to the direction of arrow.
iii) Release the rear cover.
iv) Remove the Bracket Hinge.

4. Troubleshooting
v) Remove the Cover-Open Assy. Remove 6 screws. And remove the bottom cover.
vi) Check if the sensor and actuator are assembled correctly.
c) When lifting the pick up assy, check that 2 rollers contacts normally.
4) Check if there are any obstacles or contamination in the paper path. Remove it.
5) Close the ADF cover.
6) Open the DADF unit. Check if the reflection film is contaminated. Clean it.
7) Close the DADF unit.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U3–3313
U3–3511
U3–3513
U3–3514
► Error message
► Symptom
a) Check if the paper jam has occurred on DADF tray.
2) Open the ADF cover. Remove the paper on Guide-Pick up Assy.
3) Check if the actuator and pick up assy operate normally.

a) Check the operation of the regi sensor actuator and feed out sensor actuator.
b) If the regi sensor operation is OK, check the followings.

4. Troubleshooting
i) Remove 1 screw and push the hook.
ii) Release the Stacker by pulling it to the direction of arrow.
iii) Release the rear cover.
iv) Remove the Bracket Hinge.

4. Troubleshooting
v) Remove the Cover-Open Assy. Remove 6 screws. And remove the bottom cover.
vi) Check if the sensor and actuator are assembled correctly.
5) Close the ADF cover.
6) Open the DADF unit.

a) Check if the reflection film is contaminated. Clean it.
b) If the problem persists, check the followings.

i) Open the DADF cover.

4. Troubleshooting
ii) Pull the lever and release the pick up Assy.
iii) Push and release the Stacker Assy.
iv) Remove the Guide Pick Up Upper after removing 4 screws.
v) Check if the sensor is assembled correctly. If the sensor is defective, replace it.
7) Check if the simplex scan sensor connector is connected correctly.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U3–3314
U3–3511
U3–3513
U3–3514
► Error message
► Symptom
2) Open the ADF cover. Check if the paper jam is occurred.
3) Pull the green lever of the Guide Exit Lower. Remove the jammed paper.

a) Remove the DADF Unit and white sponge.

4. Troubleshooting
b) Open the Guide Exit Lower Assy.
c) Check the sensor.
d) Remove the screw. Check the sensor connection, If the connection is OK, replace the sensor.
6) Push the white bar. Check if it returns in original condition.

4. Troubleshooting
► Error Code
U3–3711
U3–3713
U3–3714
► Error message
Original paper jam in the exit area of scanner
► Symptom
2) Open the ADF cover. Check if the paper jam is occurred.
3) Pull the green lever of the Guide Exit Lower. Remove the jammed paper.
5) If the problem persists, check the exit sensor and connection.

a) Remove the DADF Unit and white sponge.

4. Troubleshooting
b) Remove the Exit Lower after removing 4 screws.
c) Check if the sensor and actuator are assembled correctly.
6) Push the white bar. Check if it returns in original condition.

4. Troubleshooting
4.7. Image quality problems and solutions
Print-quality defects can be attributed to printer components, consumables, media, internal software, external software
applications and environmental conditions.
To successfully troubleshoot print-quality problems, as many variables as possible must be eliminated.
The first step is to generate prints using printable pages embedded in the printer on laser paper. The paper should be from
an unopened ream that has been acclimated to room temperature and you should ensure that genuine Samsung Toner
is installed in the printer.
1) Vertical white band and Dark band
Step Section Check item Result Action

1 Drum Unit The surface of the OPC drum is scratched. Yes Replace the drum unit.
2 Dirty on the outside. Yes Clean.
3 Contact terminals make good connection No Clean contact terminals.
between each drum unit and machine.
4 Developing bias contact terminal makes No Clean contact terminal and check
good connection. terminal position.
5 LSU The surface of the LSU window is dirty. Yes Clean the LSU window.
6 The problem has been eliminated through No Replace the LSU.
the checks of steps up to 5.
7 Scanner Original is damaged or dirty. Yes Change original.
8 Scanner glass white sheet is dirty. Yes Clean or replace the pad.
9 Original glass is dirty. Yes Wipe the surface clean with a soft
cloth.
10 Remove the scanner glass. Check the Yes Clean the contaminated part.
followings.
• Mirror is dirty. CAUTION
• Lamp is dirty. Fragile parts!
• Reflectors are dirty.
11 Check CCD lens surface against Yes Clean the contaminated part.
contamination or foreign objects.
CAUTION
Fragile parts!

4. Troubleshooting
2) Horizontal white band and dark band

3 Contact terminals make good connection No Clean contact terminals.
between each drum unit and machine.
6 Scanner glass white sheet is dirty. Yes Clean or replace the pad.
cloth.
CAUTION
Fragile parts!

4. Troubleshooting
3) Spot

5 DADF pad is dirty Yes Clean or replace the pad.
cloth.

4. Troubleshooting
4) Blurred image

1 LSU The surface of the LSU window is dirty. Yes Clean or replace the LSU.
2 Drum Unit Dirty on the outside. Yes Clean or replace the drum unit.
cloth.
CAUTION
Fragile parts!

4. Troubleshooting
5) Incorrect color registration

1 OPC-ACR Perform the OPC-ACR. (Diagnostics Yes Go to following checks.
> Color Management > Full Color
Registration)
There is still color shift.
2 OPC coupling Check if the OPC couplings of the drum Yes 1) If the coupling of the drum
unit and main drive unit are defective. unit is defective, replace the
drum unit.
2) If the coupling of the main
drive unit is defective,
replace the main drive unit.
3 ITB unit Is the transfer belt unit installed normally? No Remove and re-install the ITB
unit.
4 • Deformation or damage of the Yes Clean or replace the ITB unit.
transfer belt or stains on the transfer
belt.
• Stain or damage of the drive roller.
• Check if the couplings of the transfer
unit.
5 LSU Print the line image. Are the lines bent? Yes Replace the LSU.
6 HVPS board Check the connection of the high voltage Yes Replace the HVPS board.
supply terminal of the 1st or 2nd transfer
rollers.
7 OPC-ACR Perform OPC-ACR. After finishing service, please
perform OPC-ACR and recheck
again.

4. Troubleshooting
6) Uneven pitch and jitter image

1 Developer Unit 1.7mm or 1.2mm or 2.7mm periodic jitter Yes Replace the developer unit.
has occurred.
2 35mm or 62mm or 43mm periodic jitter or Yes Replace the developer unit.
band has occurred.
3 Drum Unit 94mm periodic jitter has occurred. Yes Replace the drum unit.
4 LSU 0.508mm or 0.65mm periodic jitter has Yes Replace the Laser Scanning Unit
occurred. (LSU).
5 Regi roller gear 2.5mm periodic jitter has occurred. Yes Replace the Regi roller gear.
6 HVPS board Check the connection of the high voltage Yes Replace the HVPS board.
supply terminal of the 1st or 2nd transfer
rollers.
7 Main Drive Unit After replacing the developer unit or drum Yes Replace the main drive unit.
unit, the periodic jitter or band has occurred.
8 ITB Unit 44mm periodic band has occurred. Yes Replace the ITB Unit.
9 Transfer Roller Assy 55~56mm periodic band has occurred. Yes Replace the Transfer Roller Assy.

4. Troubleshooting
7) Blank copy , Black copy

1 Image check A blank copy occurs. Yes Check LSU connector for proper
connection.
2 A black copy occurs Yes Check HVPS connector for proper
connection, especially, Corona
Charger and Grid Voltage
3 Drum Unit The OPC drum charge corona voltage No Check, clean, or correct the
contact of OPC drum ground contact of the contact.
drum unit is connected properly.
4 HVPS board All connectors on HVPS board are No Reconnect.
connected correctly.
5 The problem has been eliminated through No Replace the HVPS board or Main
the check of step 5. board or LSU.
6 Scanner Check if the connection between scan joint No Reconnect.
board and main board is OK. If the connection is OK, replace
the main board.

4. Troubleshooting
8) Poor fusing performance

1 Paper Check the paper type. No Set the paper type on control panel.
2 Fuser Unit The fuser unit is worn out. Yes Replace the fuser unit.
3 Check if the surface of the fuser belt & Yes Replace the fuser unit.
pressure roller is scratched.
4 Check if the heat roller control temperature No Check the NC Sensor.
is too high or low.
5 Check resistance of both heating lamps. Yes Change the heating lamp.

4. Troubleshooting
9) Stain on the paper back side

1 Transfer Roller Assy Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out? Yes Clean or replace the Transfer roller
Assy.
2 ITB Unit Is there any stain caused by a poor cleaning, Yes Clean the transfer belt.
etc. on the transfer belt?
3 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in proper Yes Take off the ITB unit. Check if
contact with the transfer belt? the transfer belt cleaning blade
contacts the belt and side plate is
assembled correctly.
4 Fuser Unit Are the fuser belt and pressure roller dirty? Yes Clean the fuser belt and pressure
roller.

4. Troubleshooting
4.8. Other errors
1) Multi-feeding
• Description : Multiple sheet of paper are fed at once.
Check and cause Solution
Pick clutch or Regi clutch does not work properly. Replace the defective clutch if necessary.
Pick up/ Forward / Retard roller is worn out or contaminated. Clean or replace the defective roller.
2) No-Power
• Description : When system power is turned on, LED and LCD on the operator panel do not come on.
The connection between main board and OPE board is bad. Reconnect or replace the harness.
HVPS/SMPS output is abnormal. Replace the HVPS/SMPS board.
3) Calibrating the touch screen (Touch screen model only)

• Description : Touch screen does not operate properly.
The linearity value for touch panel has changed due to using 1) Turn off the machine.
a machine long hours or surroundings. 2) While pressing the number 0 on numeric keys, turn the
machine on. Wait until calibration screen appears.
3) Press centre of mark + following order 1~9. Use your
finger. Perform 2 times.
4) If there is no problem, “Complete” will appear on LCD

and reboot the machine. When making a mistake, start
again from the step 1.

2
1
6
5
4
3
3
2
1
6
5
4
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
11
10
14
13
12
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
11
10
LED1
LED0
MX2P
MX1P
MX0P
MX3P
MX1N
MX2N
MX0N
MX3N
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
FDI_nEN
US BD_DP
5V2_S US P
3_3VS US P
FDI
DP _HOS T
CN6
CN1
DM_HOS T
CN18
US BD_DM
3_3VS US P
3_3VS US P
C N2 2
C N2 0
CN16
S ATA IF
US BD_VBUS
FDI_nDETECT
FDI_NOT_RDY
US B HOS T
NETWORK
US B DEVICE
5V2_US B_HOS
S ATA P O WE R
S ATA_ R X_ P
S ATA_ TX_ P
DG ND
DG ND
S ATA_ R X_ N
DG ND
S ATA_ TX_ N
DG ND
5 V2 _ S ATA
T
FDI_EN_COP Y_EXIT
FDI_nDETECT_P S IZE
FDI_nEN_COP Y_CNT
FDI_nDETECT_COLOR
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
HDD
CN31
ITB_MOTOR & ITB ENCODER
10 1 DIR_BLDC_ITB
9 2 CLK_BLDC_ITB
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_ITB CN27 CN12
7 4 nEN_BLDC_ITB CN35 OP C / DEV BLDC S MP S _24V
ITB 6 5 GAIN_BLDC_ITB MS OK IF
BLDC 5 6 BRAKE_BLDC_ITB 10 1 DIR_BLDC_OP C3 24V_S MP S 1 1 1
4 7 DGND DGND 1 11 9 2 CLK_BLDC_OP C3 DGND 2 7
3 8 DGND S P I0_S CK 2 12 8 3 nREADY_BLDC_OP C3 24V_S MP S 2 3 2
2 9 24V3 DGND 3 9 7 4 nEN_BLDC_OP C3 DGND 4 8
1 10 24V3 S P I0_MOS I 4 10 6 5 GAIN_BLDC_OP C3 24V_S MP S 3 5
OP C DEV Y 3
DGND 5 7 5 6 BRAKE_BLDC_OP C3 DGND 6
BLDC 9
11 T1_MOT_B S P I0_nS S 0 6 8 4 7 DGND 24V_S MP S 4 7
4 4
ITB T1 P OS ITION 12 T1_MOT_NB DGND 7 5 3 8 DGND DGND 8
3 10
13 T1_MOT_NA S P I0_MIS O 8 6 2 9 24V4 24V_S MP S 5 9
S TEP 2 5
14 T1_MOT_A 3_3VS LP 9 3 1 10 24V4 DGND 10
1 11
P BA-MS OK
S CL0_C4N 10 4 24V_S MP S 6 11 6
15 3_3VLP 3_3VS LP 11 1 10 11 DIR_BLDC_OP C2 DGND 12
3 1 12
T1 P OS _ 1 S DA0_C4N 12 2 12 CLK_BLDC_OP C2
2 16 DGND 9
P HOTO 2 2 13 nREADY_BLDC_OP C2
1 17 nS ENS _T1_P OS 8 CN20
3 3 14 nEN_BLDC_OP C2
18 5V3_LP 7 S MP S _5V
1 4 4 15 GAIN_BLDC_OP C2
19 ITB_ENCODER_B 6
5 5
IN T E R
2 OP C DEV M 16 BRAKE_BLDC_OP C2 5V_S MP S 1 1 1
P BA- 20 3_3VLP 5
3 6 6 CN32 BLDC 17 DGND DGND 2 5
21 DGND 4
P BA-Modula r_IF
ITB ENCODER 7 7 FEED I/F 18 DGND
4 22 ITB_ENCODER_A 3 5V_S MP S 2 3 2
5 8 8 DIR_BLDC_FEED 1 10 19 24V4 DGND 4 6
2
23 (NC) CLK_BLDC_FEED 2 9 1 20 24V4 5V_S MP S 3 5 3
nREADY_BLDC_FEED 3 8 DGND 6 7
P BA-S MP S
24 (NC)
nEN_BLDC_FEED 4 7 10 21 DIR_BLDC_OP C1 5V_S MP S 4 7 4
1 25 24V GAIN_BLDC_FEED 5 6 9 22 CLK_BLDC_OP C1 DGND 8 8
FEED BLDC
REAR 2 26 P WM_FAN_REAR_CON BRAKE_BLDC_FEED 6 5 8 23 nREADY_BLDC_OP C1
E
R
T
N
5. System Diagram
FAN 3 27 nS ENS _FAN_REAR_CON DGND 7 4 7 24 nEN_BLDC_OP C1 CN21
4 28 DGND DGND 8 3 6 25 GAIN_BLDC_OP C1 S MP S
24V3 9 2 OP C DEV C 26 BRAKE_BLDC_OP C1
5 5V_S MP S 1 1 6
24V3 10 1 BLDC 27 DGND
CN37 4 EN_24V 2 5
3 28 DGND
ERAS ER_LAMP & OUTER_HUMI 24V_S MP S 1 3 4
FEED_CLUTCH_CON 11 1 29 24V4
E
R
T
N
FEED CLUTCH 2 P WM_FAN_S MP S _CON 4 3
1 DGND 12 2 30 24V4
ERAS ER LED 1 nS ENS _FAN_S MP S _CON 5 2
2 1 ON_ERAS ER_3
2 ERAS E_LED_K3 DGND 6 1
P ICKUP _CLUTCH_CON 13 1 31 DIR_BLDC_OP C0
I
1
E
R
T
N
ERAS ER LED 3 P ICKUP CLUTCH 10
ON_ERAS ER_2 DGND 14 2 32 CLK_BLDC_OP C0
2 9
4 ERAS E_LED_K2 33 nREADY_BLDC_OP C0
8
IN T E R
1 5 ON_ERAS ER_1 34 nEN_BLDC_OP C0
ERAS ER LED 7
2 6 ERAS E_LED_K1 35 GAIN_BLDC_OP C0
7 6 1
ON_ERAS ER_0 OP C DEV K 36
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

1 BRAKE_BLDC_OP C0 S MP S
E
R
T
N
ERAS ER LED 8 CN11 5 2
2 ERAS E_LED_K0 BLDC 37 DGND FAN
CTD / ACR / P ICKUP / REGI IF 3 4 3
CS T P ICKLEV_ 3 38 DGND
1 9 P WM_FAN_FDB_CON 24 2 39 24V4
FDB DGND 1 P HOTO 2
E
1
R
T
N
2 10 nS ENS _FAN_FDB_CON 3_3VLP 2 23 40 24V4
FAN 11 1
3 DGND 22

nS ENS _CS T_P ICKLEVEL 3 3
3_3VLP 4 21 P EMP TY_
2
4 12 OUT_TEMP 20 P HOTO
HUMIDITY / nS ENS _P _EMP TY 5 1
3 13 DGND 19 1
TEMP ARATURE LIFT_S W_IN 6 CN43
2 14 HUMIDITY 18 1 2
S ENS OR LIFT_S W_OUT 7 MICRO S WITCH OP C CRUM / HOME S ENS OR TONER S ENS OR
1 15 3_3VA 17 2 3
5V3_LP 8
16 1 1 1 1 DGND 4
nS ENS _P AP ER_OHP 9
16 (NC) nS ENS _REGI 10 15 3 2 2 2 2 S CL_CRUM_OP C3
17 OHP _ CRUM P BA
RX
(NC)
P BA-
DGND 11 14 2 3 3 3 3 S DA_CRUM_OP C3 1
REFLECTIVE
Modula r_IF
18 (NC) 4
TX (LED)
REGI_CLUTCH_CON 12 13 1 4 4 4 3_3V_CRUM 2
TONER S ENS OR
12 3
TONER WAS TE
24V3 13
TONER WAS TE
4 19 ITBAUG_MOT_B 3 3 5 3_3VLP 4
DGND 14 11 REGI_ OP C HOME_Y_ CN24
ITB AUG 3 20 ITBAUG_MOT_NB 2 2 6 DGND
5V_ACR 15 10 REFLECTIVE P HOTO TC S ENS OR I/F
S TEP 2 21 ITBAUG_MOT_NA 1 1 7 nS ENS _OP C_HOME3_CON
ACR_LED_REAR_CON 16 9 1
1 22 ITBAUG_MOT_A ACR_REAR_P _CON 17 8 nS ENS _WAS TE_BOTTLE 1 17 2
1 1 TONER S ENS OR
1
P BA-CONNECTOR
CTD_S H_LED_CON 18 7 P ICKUP CLUTCH 1 8 DGND 3_3VS US P 2 16 3
6 2 2 2 2 9 S CL_CRUM_OP C2 4
CTDS _S H_CON 19 TNR_VOUT1 3 15
CRUM P BA
P BA-
CTDP _S H_CON 20 5 5 3 3 3 10 S DA_CRUM_OP C2 DGND 4 14
Modula r_IF
CN25 ACR_LED_FRONT_CON 21 4 4 4 4 4 11 3_3V_CRUM TS EN_VCONT1 5 13 1
EXIT & FUS ER_MTR ACR_FRONT_P _CON 22 3 ACR_REAR TS EN_VCONT0 6 12 2
3 TONER S ENS OR
INNER_TEMP 23 2 S ENS OR 3 12 3_3VLP EN_WAS TE_LED 7 11 3
FUS ER REL_ 1 2 OP C HOME_M_
I
1 24V2
E
R
T
N
DGND 24 1 1 2 13 DGND 5V3_LP 8 10 4
CLUTCH 2 2 FUS ER_REL_CLUTCH_CON P HOTO
1 14 nS ENS _OP C_HOME2_CON TNR_VOUT0 9 9
5 WTB_LEVEL 10 8 3
3 DIR_BLDC_FUS ER 4 1 1 P HOTO
10 1 15 DGND DGND 11 7 2
4 CLK_BLDC_FUS ER 3 CTD S ENS OR 2 2 INTERRUP TOR
9 2 16 S CL_CRUM_OP C1 TNR_VOUT3 12 6 1
CRUM P BA
P BA-
8 5 nREADY_BLDC_FUS ER 2 3 3 3 17 S DA_CRUM_OP C1 TNR_VOUT2 13 5
Modula r_IF
7 6 nEN_BLDC_FUS ER 1 4 4 4 18 3_3V_CRUM DGND 14 4
P BA-TONER CONNECTOR
FUS ER 6 7 GAIN_BLDC_FUS ER TS EN_VCONT2 15
5 3
BLDC 5 8 BRAKE_BLDC_FUS ER 3 19 3_3VLP DGND 16
4 OP C HOME_C_ 2
4 9 DGND ACR_FRONT 2 20 DGND TS EN_VCONT3 17
3 P HOTO 1
3 10 DGND S ENS OR 1 21 nS ENS _OP C_HOME1_CON
2
2 11 24V1_S W
1
1 12 24V1_S W 1 1 22 DGND
1
1 INNER TEMP . 2 2 2 23 S CL_CRUM_OP C0
13 (NC) 2 S ENS OR CRUM P BA CN8
P BA-
3 3 3 24 S DA_CRUM_OP C0
Modula r_IF
4 4 4 25 3_3V_CRUM FRONT_COVER
DGND 1 3
CN33 3 26 3_3VLP 5V 2 WRAP J AM_
OP C HOME_K_ 2
S IDE COVER 2 27 DGND nS ENS _WRAP J AM 3 REFLECTIVE
P HOTO 1
CN9 1 28 nS ENS _OP C_HOME0_CON
3 22 1 3_3VLP LS U P _MOTOR 3_3VLP 4
DP X J AM_ 3
2 21 2 nS ENS _JAM_DP X DGND 5
P HOTO 5V3_LP _LS U 1 1 2 EXIT_P HOTO
1 20 3 nS ENS _DP X_READY EXIT_P HOTO 6
5V3_LP _LS U 2 2 1
19 4 nS ENS _MP _EMP TY CN38
DGND 3 3
1 18 5 nS ENS _WIDTH FDB & CS T_S ENS OR 3_3VS LP 7 3
DP X1 24V1_S W 4 4 OUTBIN FULL_
2 17 6 (NC) DGND 8 2
FAN DGND 5 5 10 1 ZERO_CROS S _IN P HOTO
IN T E R
IN T E R
3 16 7 (NC) nS ENS _OUTBIN_FULL 9 1
nEN_LS U_MOT 6 6 9 2 DGND
15 8 DP X2_MOT_NA
nREADY_LS U 7 7 8 3 DGND
1 14 9 DP X2_MOT_A DP X_S OL_CON 10 1 DP X_
I
8
E
T
R
N
DP X2 10 DP X2_MOT_B CLK_LS U_MOT 8 7 4 5V3_LP

2 13 24V2 11 2 S OLENOID
FAN 11 DP X2_MOT_NB 6 5 FUS ER_24V
IN T E R
3 12
12 nS ENS _FAN_DP X1_CON 5 6 ON_FUS ER_RELAY
11 CN12 DP X1_MOT_B 12 4
13 P WM_FAN_DP X1_CON 4 7 FUS ER_24V
4 10 LS U 0/1/2/3 DP X1_MOT_NB 13 3 DP X1
14 nS ENS _FAN_DP X2_CON 3 8 DGND
DP X2 3 9 DP X1_MOT_NA 14
D r a w -C o n n e c t o r
2 9 ON_FUS ER_MAIN1 2 S TEP
S TEP 2 8 15 P WM_FAN_DP X2_CON nDETECT_LS U 1 DP X1_MOT_A 15 1
60 1 10 ON_FUS ER_MAIN0
16 24V2
P BA-F DB
1 7 DGND 2 59
P BA-S IDE J OINT

6 17 MP _CLUTCH_CON nVDO3_DN_2B 3 (NC) 16
58 3 11 AC_S LEEP 1
MP 1 5 18 3_3VS LP nVDO3_DP _2B 4 57 2 12 DGND
CLUTCH 2 4 19 DGND
IN T E R
DGND 5 56 WTB_MOT_B 17 4
20 DGND 1 13 AC_S LEEP 0
3 nS H_LS U3_2B_CON 6 55 WTB_MOT_NB 18 3 WTB MOTOR
2 21 DGND 14 (NC)
3 nS H_LS U2_2B_CON 7 54 WTB_MOT_NA 19 2 S TEP
MP EMP TY_ 1 22 DGND WTB_MOT_A 20
2 DGND 8 53 3 1
P HOTO CS T LOW LEV1_ 15 3_3VLP
1 nVDO2_DN_2B 9 52 2
P HOTO 16 DGND
nVDO2_DP _2B 10 51 3_3VLP 21 3
1 17 nS ENS _CS T_LOWLEVEL1 FUS ER HOME_
3 DGND 11 50 DGND 22 2
DP X READY_ P HOTO
2 nVDO1_DN_2B 12 49 nS ENS _FUS ER_HOME 23 1
P HOTO 3 18 3_3VLP
1 nVDO1_DP _2B 13 48 CS T LOW LEV2_
2 19 DGND
DGND 14 47 P HOTO (NC) 24
1 20 nS ENS _CS T_LOWLEVEL2
3 nS H_LS U1_2B_CON 15 46
WIDTH_ nS H_LS U0_2B_CON 16 45 P WM_FAN_FRONT_CON 25 1
2 21 (NC) FRONT
I
E
R
T
N
P HOTO DGND 17 nS ENS _FAN_FRONT_CON 26 2

1 44 FAN
nVDO0_DN_2B 18 43 DGND 27 3
LIFT 1 22 DMOT_LIFT_A
E
R
T
N
nVDO0_DP _2B 19 42 DC MOTOR 2 23 LIFT_S W_OUT
DGND 20 41 P WM_FAN_EXIT1_CON 28 1
EXIT1
I
E
R
T
N
CN17 nVDO3_DN_1B 21 40 nS ENS _FAN_EXIT1_CON 29 2

24 (NC) FAN
CN2 CN1 HVP S _1 nVDO3_DP _1B 22 39 DGND 30 3
DGND 23 38
36 4 25 P _S IZE_DIGIT
1 1 1 P WM_MHV0 nHS YNC2_DN 24 37 P WM_FAN_EXIT2_CON 31 1
P AP ER_S IZE 3 26 DGND EXIT2
I
E
R
T
N
LS U 2 35 2 nEN_MHV0 nHS YNC2_DP 25 36 nS ENS _FAN_EXIT2_CON 32 2

2 S ENS OR 2 27 ADC_P _S IZE FAN
FAN 3 34 3 P WM_MHV1 DGND 26 35 DGND 33 3
3 1 28 3_3VS LP
33 4 nEN_MHV1 nS H_LS U3_1B_CON 27 34
32 5 P WM_MHV2 nLDON_LSU3_CON 28 33 (NC) 34
31 6 nEN_MHV2 DGND 29 32
P BA-LS U
30 7 P WM_MHV3 LS U_LD3_P OWER 30 31 CN39 5V3 35 1
MICR O SWITCH
29 8 nEN_MHV3 DGND 31 30 FUS ER I/F 5V3_S W 36 2
28 9 P WM_AC_VP P 3 nVDO2_DN_1B 32 29
27 10 P WM_DEV_DC3 nVDO2_DP _1B 33 28 1 24V1_S W 24V1 37
26 11 READ_MHV2 DGND 34 27 24V1 38 1
MICRO S WITCH
25 nS H_LS U2_1B_CON 35 1 2 FUS ER_THERM1 24V1_S W 39 2
I
12 READ_MHV3 26
E
R
T
N
24 THERMIS TOR_R
13 DGND nLDON_LSU2_CON 36 25 2 3 3_3V_FUS ER 24V1_S W 40
23 14 DGND DGND 37 24
22 15 DGND LS U_LD2_P OWER 38 23 4 DGND
21 16 24V1_S W DGND 39 22 1 CN26
Fusible CRUM
I
E
R
T
N
20 17 24V1_S W nVDO1_DN_1B 40 21 2 5 FUS ER CRUM TONER_BOTTLE_I/F

19 P BA 6 DGND
18 24V1_S W nVDO1_DP _1B 41 20 3
18 DMOT_TNR3_A 1 1 TONER_Y
I
E
R
T
N
19 ADC_HVP S 1_24 DGND 42 19

17 7 DGND DGND 2 2 DC MOTOR
20 3_3VLP nS H_LS U1_1B_CON 43 18
16 21 nEN_AC3 nLDON_LSU1_CON 44 17
P BA-HVP S 1
15 1 8 DGND 3_3VLP 3 3
22 P WM_AC3/2/1/0 DGND 45 16 NC T COUNT_Y_
I
DGND 4
E
R
T
N
14 LS U_LD1_P OWER 46 2 9 NC0_TD_OUT 2

23 DGND 15 THERMIS TOR TONER_COUNT3 P HOTO
13 3 10 NC0_TC_OUT 5 1
24 nEN_AC2 DGND 47 14 CENTER
12 25 P WM_AC_VP P 2 nVDO0_DN_1B 48 13 4
11 11 S hort(11P -21P ) DGND 6 1 1 1
26 P WM_DEV_DC2 nVDO0_DP _1B 49 12
10 S CL_CRUM_TB3 7 2 2 2
27 P WM_DEV_DC1 DGND 50 11 CRUM P BA
P BA-
9 12 24V1_F S DA_CRUM_TB3 8 3 3 3
28 P WM_AC_VP P 1 nHS YNC0_DN 51 10
Modula r_IF
8 3_3V_CRUM 9 4 4 4
29 P WM_DEV_DC0 nHS YNC0_DP 52 9
D r a w -C o n n e c t o r
7 30 P WM_AC_VP P 0 DGND 53 8 1 13 NC1_TC_OUT

NC DMOT_TNR2_A 10 1 TONER_M
I
E
R
T
N
I
E
R
T
N
6 31 LS U FAN_FB nS H_LS U0_1B_CON 54 7 2 14 NC1_TD_OUT

THERMIS TOR DGND 11 2 DC MOTOR
5 32 nEN_AC1 nLDON_LSU0_CON 55 6 3 15 DGND
S IDE
4 33 nEN_AC0 DGND 56 5 4
3 3_3VLP 12 3
34 P WM_LS U FAN LS U_LD0_P OWER 57 4 16 (NC) T COUNT_M_
2 DGND 13 2
35 READ_MHV0 DGND 58 3 17 (NC) P HOTO
1 TONER_COUNT2 14 1
36 READ_MHV1 LS U_TEMP 59 2 18 (NC)
DGND 60 1 1 1 1
19 3_3V_FUS ER DGND 15
1
I
E
R
T
N
THERMIS TOR_F S CL_CRUM_TB2 16 2 2 2

2 20 FUS ER_THERM0 CRUM P BA
P BA-
CN34 S DA_CRUM_TB2 17 3 3 3
Modula r_IF
HVP S _2 3_3V_CRUM 18 4 4 4
21 S hort(11P -21P )
22 1 3_3VS B DMOT_TNR1_A 19 1 TONER_C
I
E
R
T
N
22 (NC)
21 2 P WM_S AW CN32 DGND 20 2 DC MOTOR
20 3 P WM_FUS ER_BIAS S CF I/F 1
19 4 READ_THV2 2 3_3VLP 21 3
24V5 1 T COUNT_C_
18 5 nEN_THV2 3 CN40 DGND 21 2
24V5 2 P HOTO
17 6 P WM_THV2 4 FINIS HER I/F TONER_COUNT1 23 1
16 7 READ_THV1_1 24V5 3 5 15
15 8 READ_THV1_2 3_3VS LP 4 6 14 15 1 nDETECT_FINIS HER DGND 24 1 1 1
14 9 READ_THV1_3 3_3VS LP 5 7 13 14 2 FINIS HER_TXD S CL_CRUM_TB1 25 2 2 2
CRUM P BA
P BA-
13 10 P WM_THV1_0_CON 3_3VS LP 6 8 12 13 3 FINIS HER_RXD S DA_CRUM_TB1 26 3 3 3

Modula r_IF
12 11 P WM_THV1_0 nRS T_S CF 7 9 11 12 4 nRS T_FINIS HER 3_3V_CRUM 27 4 4 4

11 12 P WM_THV1_1 S CF_TXD 8 10 10 11 5 IF_FINIS HER
10 13 P WM_THV1_2 S CF_RXD 9 11 DMOT_TNR0_A 28 1 TONER_K
I
E
R
T
N
9 10 6 3_3V_P S
9 14 P WM_THV1_3 (NC) 10 12 9 7 5V_P S DGND 29 2 DC MOTOR
8
8 15 DGND nCMD_REQ_S CF 11 13
D-S UB
7 8 8 24V_3
7 16 DGND 5V4_S LP 12 14 3_3VLP 30 3
P BA-HVP S 2
6 7 9 24V_3 T COUNT_K_
7501S -15G1T
6 17 DGND (NC) 13 15 6 10 24V_3 DGND 31 2

5 P HOTO
AMP , 5-292178-1(22P )
5 18 DGND DGND 14 16 5 TONER_COUNT0 32 1

DRAWER è CONNECTOR
4 11 DGND
4 19 3_3VLP DGND 15 17 3 4 12 DGND
P BA-FINIS HER_IF
(se e S CF pa rt for more informa tion)
3 20 24V1_S W DGND 16 18 3 DGND 33 1 1 1

2 13 DGND
2 21 24V1_S W DGND 17 19 2 S CL_CRUM_TB0 34 2 2 2
1 14 DGND CRUM P BA
P BA-
1 22 24V1_S W DGND 18 20 1 S DA_CRUM_TB0 35 3 3 3

15 DGND
Modula r_IF
21 3_3V_CRUM 36 4 4 4
22
5-1
5. System Diagram
5. System Diagram
INTERRUP TOR
INTERRUP TOR
S TEP MOTOR
P HOTO
P HOTO
FAN
4
3
2
1
1
3
2
1
3
2
2
I
N
T
E
R
P BA-MAIN
CN2
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
CN7 S CAN IF
P LATEN COVER OP EN
CCD HOME S ENS OR

S CAN_MOT_A
S CAN_MOT_NA
GND
GND
S ENS _FAN_FLAT_CON
P WM_FAN_FLAT_CON
S CAN_MOT_NB
S CAN_MOT_B
VCC_COVER_OP EN1
nFLAT_COVER_OP EN1
VCC_CCD_HOME
CCD_HOME
15 1 S CAN_MOT_A
S CAN MOTOR
P LATEN_FAN
14 2 S CAN_MOT_NB
13 3 24V2_LP
CN2
CN3
CN5
CN7
12 4 GND
11 5 3.3V_WKS RC_SCAN
10 6 5V3_LP
9 7 nRS T_ADF
8 8 ADF_RXD
P BA-S CAN IF
7 9 nS ENS _P _P OS 2 GRAP HIC UI P ANEL

6 10 nFLAT_COVER_OP EN1 (s e e UI pa rt for more informa tion)
5 11 CCD_HOME
4 12 N.C
3 13 nS ENS _P _DETECT
2 14 nS ENS _AP S _LT
1 GND CN13 CN4 CN12 CN1
15
30 OP E P OWER IF
P BA-OP E MAIN
16 GND
P BA-OP E KEY
KEY_IN2 1 20
29 17 nS ENS _AP S _LG DGND 1 10 KEY_IN1 2 19
28 18 P WM_FAN_FLAT_CON DGND 2 9
27 KEY_IN4 3 18
19 S ENS _FAN_FLAT_CON DGND 3 8 KEY_IN3 4 17
26 20 VCC_CCD_HOME WKUP 2OP E 4 7 KEY_IN0 5 16
25 21 VCC_COVER_OP EN1 nWKUP 2MCB 5 6 6 15
nS ENS _P _DETECT
24 GND DGND
22 5V3_OP E 6 5
nS ENS _AP S _LG
KEY_OUT1 7 14
nS ENS _AP S _LT
nS ENS _P _P OS 1
nS ENS _P _P OS 2
23 23 nS ENS _P _P OS 1
INTERRUP TOR
INTERRUP TOR
nKEY_S OFT_P WR 7 4 KEY_OUT4 8 13

22 24 ADF_TXD 5V3_OP E 8 3
AP S I/F
ADF IF
KEY_OUT0 9 12
P HOTO
CLUTCH
P HOTO
MOTOR
P ICKUP
MOTOR
CN6
nRS T_ADF
21 5V3_LP
CN1
25
FEED
ADF_RXD
5V3_OP E 9 2
ADF_TXD
KEY_OUT2 10 11
20 26 GND 5V3_OP E 10 1 KEY_OUT3 11 10
3.3VS
19 27 GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
S P EAKER_P 11 5VS 12 9
24V
24V
5V
5V
18 28 24V2_LP
5V
5V
S P EAKER_N 12 LED_S TART_GRN 13 8

17 29 S CAN_MOT_B
LED_INTERRUP T 14 7
16 30 S CAN_MOT_NA
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
6
1
2
3
4
5
LED_S OFT_P WR 15 6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
2
1
3
2
1
6
1
3
4
CN7
4
6
1
3
1
2
CN1 nKEY_S OFT_P WR 16 5

OP E US B IF
LED_ECO 17 4
1 KEY_BUZZER_P 18 3
RS T_US B_HUB_OP E 1
CN3 2 KEY_BUZZER_N 19 2
I I I DM_OP E 2
N N N
P LATEN CCDM I/F 3 DGND 20 1
T T T DP _OP E 3
E E E DGND 4 4
R R 1 1 24V
R DGND 5
2 2 GND
3 3 GND
4 4 3.3V
CN1
3
2
1
6
5
4
5
CN1
5 GND
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
10
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
9
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
6 6 3.3V
7
MOTOR & CLUTCH
7 GND
nS ENS _P _EXIT
GND
nS ENS _P _REGI
GND
VCC
N.C
24V
FEED_MOT_NA
FEED_MOT_A
P ICKUP _MOT_NA
P ICKUP _MOT_A
VCC
N.C
REGI_CLUTCH
FEED_MOT_B
FEED_MOT_NB
P ICKUP _MOT_B
P ICKUP _MOT_NB
REGI S ENS OR
EXIT S ENS OR
8 8 3.3V
9 2
9 GND
CN10
CN7
S P EACKER
P BA-AP S IF
10
CN5
10 5V
11 1
11 GND
12 12 5V
13 13 GND
14
nS ENS _AP S _LG
nS ENS _AP S _LT
14 5V
15 15 GND
AP S I/F
16
CN2
16 FLAT_AFE0
17 17 FLAT_AFE1
CCDM MODULE
18 18 GND
( P LATEN)
GND
GND
19 19 FLAT_AFE2
5V
5V
20
P BA-ADF
20 FLAT_AFE3
21 21 GND
22
6
1
2
3
4
5
22 FLAT_AFE4
23 23 FLAT_AFE5
24
25
24
25
GND
FLAT_AFE6 P BA-F AX
26 26 FLAT_AFE7
27 27 GND
28 28 FLAT_TG
29 29 GND
30 30 FLAT_AFE_S DI CN5
31 31 GND MODEM IF CN1
32 32 24V
33 33 GND 5V2_S US P 1 1 5V
3
2
1
2
1
3
GND
nS ENS _P ICKUP _R_DET
nS ENS _P _FEED
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
nS ENS _P _DET1
VCC
nS ENS _P _DET2
VCC
34 5V2_S US P 2 2 DGND
P AP ER DET,FEED,P -ROLLER DET
34 FLAT_AFE_S DO
35 3_3VS US P 3 3 DGND
P AP ER LENGTH S ENS OR
ADF COVER OP EN / FAN
35 FLAT_AFE_S CLK
S CAN READ S ENS OR
36 36 FLAT_AFE_S EN 3_3VS US P 4 4 CML_MODEM

NS ENS _P _P OS 2
NS ENS _P _P OS 1
37 37 GND 3_3VS US P 5 5 DGND

ADF_FAN_P WR
AP S 2
AP S 1
nS ENS _P _S IZE
COVER_OP EN
38 DGND 6 6 DGND
FAN_ADF_FB
38 FLAT_ADC_nCLK
S ENS OR
39 3_3VS US P 7 7 nRS T_MODEM

CN11
CN8
FLAT_ADC_pCLK
CN5
39
CN9
40 40 GND DGND 8 8 DGND

CML_MODEM 9 9 DGND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
DGND 10 10 DGND
5V
5V
AOUT 11 11 TXD_MODEM
CN47 DGND 12 12 DGND
ADF CCDM I/F
11
12
10
nRS T_MODEM 13 13 RXD_MODEM

1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
1
F AX J O IN T P B A
DGND 14 14 DGND
1 1 GND nCTS _MODEM 15 15 DGND
2 2 ADF_ADC_pCLK DGND 16 16 3_3V
3 3 ADF_ADC_nCLK nRTS _MODEM 17 17 3_3V
I 4 4 GND
N DGND 18 18 DGND
5 5 ADF_AFE_S EN
T nDETECT_MODEM 19 19 DGND
E 6 6 ADF_AFE_S CLK
R
DGND 20 20 AOUT
7 7 ADF_AFE_S DO MODEM_TXD 21 21 DGND
8 8 ADF_AFE_S DI DGND 22 22 DGND
9 9 GND MODEM_RXD 23 23 nCTS _MODEM
10 10 ADF_TG DGND 24 24 nRTS _MODEM
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
11 11 GND nRI_MODEM 25 25 DGND

12 12 ADF_AFE7 DGND 26 26 DGND
13
INTERRUP TOR
ADF_AFE6
INTERRUP TOR
13
INTERRUP TOR
INTERRUP TOR
INTERRUP TOR
INTERRUP TOR
INTERRUP TOR
INTERRUP TOR
CCDM MODULE
nINT_MODEM 27 27 RI_MODEM
14 14 GND DGND 28 28 DGND
P HOTO
P HOTO
P HOTO
P HOTO
P HOTO
P HOTO
P HOTO
P HOTO
15 15 ADF_AFE5
( ADF)
FAN
nDCD_MODEM 29 29 nINT_MODEM
16 16 ADF_AFE4 DGND 30 30 DCD_MODEM
17 17 GND
18 18 ADF_AFE3
19 19 ADF_AFE2
20 20 GND
21 21 ADF_AFE1
22 22 ADF_AFE0
23 23 GND
24 24 3.3V
25 25 3.3V
26 26 GND
27 27 5V
5-2 28
29
30
28
29
30
5V
GND
24V
Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.
31 31 24V

This chapter contains the tools list, list of abbreviations used in this manual, and a guide to the location space required when
installing the printer. A definition of test pages and Wireless Network information definition is also included.
6.1. Tools for Troubleshooting
The following tools are recommended safe and easy troubleshooting as described in this service manual.
Tool Image Use Remark

Hand DVM Checking the fuser lamp. Service
Checking the SMPS fuse.
Spring hook When disassembling the spring Service

Small vacuum To remove the toner and contamination Service
inside of the machine.
Driver To tighten screws. Service

To remove the hinge of the cover.
Tweezers To unplug the pin connector of the fuser Service

unit.
To remove the E-ring.
Soft cloth To clean the rollers Service
To clean the frame and scan glass
Black soft cloth To cover the OPC drum Service
Install guide, User guide, When installing the machine. Installation

Admin guide
Software CD When installing the machine. Installation

Tool Image Use Remark

Test Chart To check the image quality Service
• A4 image, Skew
Spare Kit To fix the unit or parts Service

• Screw, E-Ring
Clamp To form the harness Service
Grease To remove the noise by gear. Service

• G-8050 : JC81–08663A (200g)
• SPY272 : JC81–08664A (100g)

6.2. Glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with
printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide and service manual.
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by
802.11
the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11
802.11b/g/n Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer
interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication
Access point devices together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and
receiver of WLAN radio signals.
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original
ADF
sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once.
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It
AppleTalk was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP
networking.
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in
a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits
BIT Depth
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is
commonly called as monochrome or black and white.
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI),
BMP
and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform.
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically.
This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is
CCD
also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device
Collation
prints an entire set before printing additional copies.
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed.
Control Panel
They are typically found in front of the machine.
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage
means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has
Coverage
complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner
usage will be as much as the coverage.
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between
CSV disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard
throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and
DADF
turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized.
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP
server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally,
DHCP
information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a
mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all
DIMM
the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.

The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on a home network to
DLNA
share information with each other across the network.
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in
DNS
a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth
Dot Matrix Printer on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a
typewriter.
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally,
DPI
higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a
DRPD
user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or
Duplex scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of
paper during one print cycle.
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the
printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity
Duty Cycle
of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per
month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines
ECM or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that
are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator
duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like
Emulation the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast
to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering
its internal state.
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines
wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access
Ethernet
control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It
has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the
EtherTalk
original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device
FDI such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service
on your machine.
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network
FTP
that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet).
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a heat roller and
a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure
Fuser Unit
to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes
out of a laser printer.
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is
Gateway
very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network.
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted
Grayscale
to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray.
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of
Halftone
a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage
HDD
device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional
IEEE
organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity.
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 1284 (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that
attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer).
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public
Intranet telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with
its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and
IP address
communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the
IPM
number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute.
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print
jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds
IPP
of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more
capable and secure printing solution than older ones.
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking
protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection
IPX/SPX services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities
to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient
protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body
ISO composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize
and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,
ITU-T
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different
countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions.
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy
JBIG or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can
also be used on other images.
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy
JPEG compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs
on the World Wide Web.
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and
LDAP
modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.
LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine.
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC
address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e.
MAC address
g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its
manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one
MFP
physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be
transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a
MH
codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most
faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6.

A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a
Modem
carrier signal to decode transmitted information.
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITUT T.4. MR encodes the first
MR scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the
differences are encoded and transmitted.
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to
NetWare run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS
stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser
beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
OPC An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer, and
it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development
brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied,
Originals reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something
else.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network
OSI design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional
layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,
Data Link and Physical.
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a
PABX
private enterprise.
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a
PCL printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers,
PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for
PDF
representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the
PostScript(PS)
electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer.
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, a scanner, a
Print Media
fax or, a copier.
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works,
PPM
meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute.
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard
PRN file
input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer
Protocol
between two computing endpoints.
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched
PSTN
telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication
and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames
RADIUS
and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage
network access.
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the
Resolution
resolution.
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports,
SMB and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated
Interprocess communication mechanism.

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet.
SMTP is a relatively simple, text based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are
SMTP
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client server protocol, where the client
transmits an email message to the server.
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices
SSID in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive
and have a maximum length of 32 characters.
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the
Subnet Mask
address is the network address and which part is the host address.
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications
TCP/IP
protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status,
TCR transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only
after failed transmissions.
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes
image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the
TIFF
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format
can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications.
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder
used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner
Toner Cartridge
can be fused by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in
the paper.
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAINcompliant scanner with a
TWAIN TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture
API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and
UNC Path other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional
directory>
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet.
URL The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or
the domain name where the resource is located.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to
USB connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect
a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by
transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by
Watermark
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government
documents to discourage counterfeiting.
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same
WEP level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that
it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another.
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in
WIA Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by
using a WIAcompliant scanner.
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks,
WPA
which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP.
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A
shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or
WPA-PSK
desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the
associated WAP for more advanced security.

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If your
WPS wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the wireless network connection easily
without a computer.
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new
document format, which has benefits for portable document and electronic document, developed
XPS
by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based
device-independent document format.

GSPN (GLOBAL SERVICE PARTNER NETWORK)
Area Web Site
Europe, MENA,
https://gspn1.samsungcsportal.com
CIS, Africa
E.Asia, W.Asia,
https://gspn2.samsungcsportal.com
China, Japan
N.America, S.America https://gspn3.samsungcsportal.com
This Service Manual is a property of Samsung Electronics

© 2013 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
Co.,Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Any unauthorized use of Manual can be punished under
Printed in Korea
applicable International and/or domestic law.
Code No.:

clx8640 Series PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

clx8640 Series PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

clx8640 Series PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Color Laser MFP

2. Product specifications and Description

3. Disassembly and Reassembly

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

i Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2.6.3.1. ITB Unit overview ........................................................................................ 2 − 37

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. ii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3. Disassembly and Reassembly ................................................................................................................3 − 1

iii Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3.3.19. Pick Up Unit .............................................................................................................. 3 − 32

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. iv

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4.3.1. Updating from the Printer Control Panel ............................................................................4 − 7

v Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

4.6.1. Ax-xxxx type error code ............................................................................................... 4 − 84

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. vi

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.1. Safety warning

1) Only to be serviced by a factory trained service technician.

2) Use only Samsung replacement parts.

3) Laser Safety Statement

• Maximum power of energy output: 12 mW

1-1 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.2. Caution for safety

1.2.1. Toxic material

1.2.2. Electric shock and fire safety precautions

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 1-2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.2.3. Handling precautions

1.2.4. Assembly and Disassembly precautions

3) Disconnect interface cables and power cables.

7) Handling of the OPC Drum

1-3 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.2.5. Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

1) Be careful with the high temperature part.

2) Do not put fingers or hair into the rotating parts.

4) Ensure the printer is installed safely.

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 1-4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1.3. ESD precautions

3) Use only a grounded tip soldering iron to solder or desolder ESDs.

1-5 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2. Product specifications and Description

2.1. Product Overview

• Printing Speed (Mono/Color)

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 2-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Product Specifications are subject to change without notice.

2-2 Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Copyright© 1995-2013 SAMSUNG. All rights reserved. 2-3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine